BC-5380 Service Manual PDF

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
Copyright
2008 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2008-12 (Version: 1.0).
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability
arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual
in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and
other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial
purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,
the following procedure should be followed:
1.
Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on
the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the
Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number,
and a brief description of the reason for return;
2.
Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);
3.
Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer
Service department.
III
Company Contact
Manufacturer:
Address:
Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Phone:
+86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax:
+86 755 26582934 26582500
IV
Table of Contents
1
Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1

1.1
Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2
Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2
1.3
How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3
1.4
Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4
1.5
Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5
System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1
Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2
Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3
Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4
Main Structure ....................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5
Software structure ............................................................................................... 2-11

2.5.1
Menu structure ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.2
Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-31
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1

3.1
Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1
Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2
Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3
Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2
Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1
Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2
Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3
Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4
PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3
3.3
Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7

3.3.1
Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2
Unpacking the main unit........................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3
Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9
3.4
Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10
3.5
Connections......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6
Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-27

3.6.1
Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-27
3.7
Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-35
3.8
Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-41
3.9
Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-42
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-47

3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-53
4
Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1
Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1
Piercing needle......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2
Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1
1
Table of Contents
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1

Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1
Valves ....................................................................................................... 4-1
Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-1
Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2
Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2
Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3

4.2.1
Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2
Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5
4.2.3
WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.4
RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-6
4.2.5
HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.3
Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8

4.3.1
Sampling and dispensing procedures ...................................................... 4-8
4.3.2
DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3
WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.4
RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.5
Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-18
4.3.6
Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-18
Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1
Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.1
Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2
Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26
5.1.4
Removal ................................................................................................. 5-28
5.1.5
Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-30
5.2
Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-32

5.2.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.2
Board composition.................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.3
5.2.4
Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-49
5.2.5
5.3
Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-59

5.3.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.2
Board composition.................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.3
5.3.4
Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-78
5.3.5
5.4
Autoloader board ................................................................................................. 5-99

5.4.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.2
Board Composition................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-109
5.4.4
Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-110
5.4.5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-112
5.5
Power board ...................................................................................................... 5-117

5.5.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-117
5.5.2
Board Composition............................................................................... 5-117
5.5.3
5.5.4
Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-124
5.5.5
5.6
Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-129

5.6.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-129
5.6.2
5.6.3
Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-132
5.6.4
2
Table of Contents
5.7
Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140

5.7.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140
5.7.2
Board composition................................................................................ 5-140
5.7.3
Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-143
5.7.4
5.8
Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-148

5.8.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-148
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-151
5.8.5
5.9
Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-154

5.9.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-154
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-158
5.9.5
5.10 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-160

5.10.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-160
5.10.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-160
5.10.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-161
5.10.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-162
5.11 Key Board .......................................................................................................... 5-163
5.11.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-163
5.11.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-163
5.11.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-164
5.11.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-165
6
Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1
Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings ....................................... 6-1
6.2
General .................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3
Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.1
Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-4
6.3.2
Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3
Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-6
6.3.4
Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-7
6.3.5
Removing the front door........................................................................... 6-8
6.3.6
Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-9
6.4
Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes........................................................ 6-11

6.4.1
Replacing valves .................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.2
Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-15
6.4.3
Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-17
6.4.4
Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-18
6.4.5
Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-24
6.5
Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-26
6.6
Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-29

6.6.1
Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-29
6.6.2
Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-31
6.6.3
Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-33
6.7
Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-37
6.8
Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)................................................................... 6-39

6.8.1
Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample compartment assembly
6-39
6.8.2
Removing and replacing the detection switches of the sample transport unit
3
Table of Contents
6.8.3
6.9
6-45
Replacing the sample transport unit....................................................... 6-46
Mix mechanism.................................................................................................... 6-58
6.10 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 6-66

6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position........................................................... 6-66
6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position ..................................................................... 6-73
7
Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1
Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1
7.2
Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-3

7.2.1
Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2
Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.3
Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4
Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-7
7.2.5
Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-7
7.2.6
Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-8
7.2.7
Rear light detector assembly.................................................................. 7-10
7.3
Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.1
Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-12
7.3.2
Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-18
7.3.3
Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19
7.3.4
Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-24
7.4
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-27

7.4.1
Laser spot-deviation ............................................................................... 7-27
7.4.2
Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-27
7.4.3
Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-28
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1
Error code and information .................................................................................... 8-1
8.2
Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-9

8.2.1
Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.2
Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3
Hardware errors ..................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.4
Measurement errors............................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5
Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.6
Scattergram errors ................................................................................. 8-13
Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1

A.
Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1
B.
List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1
C.
Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1
D.
Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1
E.
Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1
F.
Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable ....... F-1
Using This Manual
1.1 Introduction
The chapter explains how to use the BC-5380 service manual. This manual provides the
reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5380. Before servicing the
BC-5380, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and
for your safety.
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operators manual of BC-5380.It does not
contain information and procedures already covered in the operators manual of BC-5380.
Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operators manual.
1-1
Using This Manual
1.2 Who Should Read This Manual

To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:
A thorough understanding of
Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices
Reagent systems
Quality control
Troubleshooting concepts
The ability to
Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology
Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope
Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology
Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology
1-2
Using This Manual
1.3 How to Find Information

This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find
the information you need.
If you want to
See
learn about the system structure and the basic
Chapter 2 System Structure
principle of the BC-5380

learn about the installation requirements and how to
Chapter
upgrade the BC-5380 software
Software Upgrade
learn about the fluidic system of the BC-5380
Chapter 4 Fluidic System
learn about the hardware system of the BC-5380
Chapter 5 Hardware System
learn about how to maintain the BC-5380
Chapter 6 Maintenance
learn about the optical system of the BC-5380
Chapter 7 Optical System
learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
System
Installation
and
of the BC-5380
learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5380
Appendix A Accessories
learn about the main wearing parts of the BC-5380
Appendix B List of Wearing Parts
learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic
Appendix C Fluidic Diagram
system of the BC-5380

learn about the function of each valve and pump of
Appendix D Pump and Valve Function
the BC-5380
Table
learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5380
Appendix E Tubing
learn about how to identify cross network cable and
Appendix F Method to Identify Cross
direct-connected network cable
Network Cable and Direct-Connected

Network Cable
1-3
Using This Manual
1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:
all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (on the external keyboard), such as
[ENTER].
bold letters included in indicate text you can find on the screen, such as Clean.
bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.
All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
your analyzer setup or data displayed.
1-4
Using This Manual
1.5 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual:
When you see
Then
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.
alerting you to information that requires your attention.
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see
It means
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTS.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
HIGH VOLTAGE
WARNING, LASER BEAM
WARNING, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
1-5
Using This Manual
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
BATCH CODE
USE BY
SERIAL NUMBER
CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)
USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR

CONTROLS)
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
IRRITATING SUBSTANCE
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE
WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER
STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS
1-6
Using This Manual

SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS
PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED
AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING
THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF
CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT
BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE
CONSEQUENCES TO THE
ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION
WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND
RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE
CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM
WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT.
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.
1-7
Using This Manual
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached

to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.
Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and
piercer.
Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.

according to government regulations.
The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.
1-8
Using This Manual
Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer

strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.
For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray

customer service department for maintenance advice.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.
Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-9
System Structure
2.1 Introduction
Hardware
Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays
information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser
control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board,
indicator board, liquid-level detecting board, key board and autoloader control board.
Interface
The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer,
which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the
interfaces of the external computer.
Software operating environment
The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main
unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is
operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software
analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints
the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions
including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.
Fluidic System
The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.
The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the
software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.
2-1
System Structure
2.2 Fluidic System

Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual
2-2
System Structure
2.3 Hardware System

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual
2-3
System Structure
2.4 Main Structure

The BC-5380 auto hematology analyzer consists of the main unit (analyzer) and the
accessories.
Figure 2-1 Front of the analyzer
1---Front cover
2---Power/Status indicator
3---[OPEN] key
4---[RUN] key
5---Tube
6---Tube rack
7---Tube
8---Adapter
9---Sample compartment door
2-4
System Structure
Figure 2-2 Back of the analyzer
1 --- Network interface
2 --- M-53D diluent sensor connector
3 --- M-53D diluent inlet
4 --- M-53 cleanser inlet
5 --- M-53LH lyse inlet
6 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet
7 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet
8 --- AC input
9 --- Waste outlet
10 --- Waste sensor connector
2-5
System Structure
Figure 2-3 Left side of the analyzer
1--- Door lock
2---Power switch
2-6
System Structure
Figure 2-4 Right side of the analyzer
1---Door lock
2---Tube
3---Tube rack
2-7
System Structure
Figure 2-5 Front of the analyzer (front cover removed)

1 --- Sampling module
2 --- Tube
3 --- Tube rack
4 --- Sample transport assembly
5 --- Sample compartment assembly
6 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly
7--- Sample injection syringe assembly
8 --- Sampling syringe assembly
9 --- Fluidic valve
10 --- Relieve valve assembly
2-8
System Structure
Figure 2-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door removed)
1 --- Front cover assembly
2 --- Diluent syringe assembly
3 --- Lyse syringe assembly
4 --- Pressure chamber assembly
5 --- Air pumps
6 --- Left door
7 --- liquid level detection unit
8 --- Valve assembly (2)
10 --- Power switch
11 --- Drive board
12 --- Data board
13 --- Mother board
14 --- Top cover
2-9
System Structure
Figure 2-7 Right side of the analyzer (right door removed)
1 --- Optical system
2 --- Isolation chamber
3 --- Sampling assembly
4 --- Fluidic valves
5 --- Fluidic valves
6 --- Volumetric unit
7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly
8 --- Right door
9 --- Waste pump assembly
11 --- Bath assembly
12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly
13 --- Pinch valve
14 --- Autoloader control board
15 ---Mix mechanism
2-10
System Structure
2.5 Software structure

The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner
the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the
external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the
parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count,
QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.
2.5.1 Menu structure

1. Shortcut button area
When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the
screen containing 10 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the
corresponding operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure 2-8.
Any screen
Run
STAT
Diluent
Worklist
Graph
Table
QC
Logout
Shutdown
Exit
Figure 2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area

2. Run message box
The menu structure of the Run message box is shown in Figure 2-9.
2-11
System Structure
RUN
AL-WB
Start
Ok
Cancel
CT-WB
Start
Ok
Cancel
CT-PD
Start
Ok
Cancel
Figure 2-9 Menu structure of the Run message box
3. Worklist screen
At the Worklist screen, you can click the function buttons to perform the corresponding
worklist-related operations.
The menu structure of the Worklist screen is shown in Figure 2-10.
2-12
System Structure
Figure 2-10 Menu structure of the worklist screen

4. Review screen
The Review menu has five submenus: Graph, Table, Data Backup, Data Export and
Compare. The Data Backup and Data Export functions can be enabled only when the analyzer
has just been started up or you are at the Table review screen; otherwise, they grey out. The
Table review includes the functions of auto-backup and auto-restore, which will be performed
automatically by the software when the condition of backup or restoring is fulfilled. The menu
structures of each screen of the Review screen are shown below.
Graph
The menu structure of the graph review screen is shown in Figure 2-11.
2-13
System Structure
Figure 2-11 Menu structure of the graph review screen
Table
The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure 2-12.
TABLE
Sample List
Samples
within Today
Delete
Deselect
Print
All Samples
Trend Graph
Samples
Found
Optical
Result
Edit Result
Restore Result
Store
Sample/
Patient Info.
Validate
Batch Validate
Search
Microscopic
Exam. and
Others
Transmit
Pos./Total
Others
Data Backup
Data Export
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
Figure 2-12 Menu structure of the table review screen
Data Export
The menu structure of the Data Export screen is shown in Figure 2-13.
2-14
CV
System Structure
Figure 2-13 Menu structure of the data export screen
Data Backup
The menu structure of the Data Backup screen is shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Menu structure of the data backup screen
Compare
The menu structure of the Compare screen is shown in Figure 2-15.
2-15
System Structure
COMPARE
Comparison
Summary
Re-fill
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print
Result Trend
Re-fill
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print
Figure 2-15 Menu structure of the compare screen

5. QC screen
The QC programs include the L-J QC, X-B QC, X QC and X -R QC. Click the shortcut
button QC of the guidance bar on the left of the screen to enter the L-J QC graph screen.
Click Menu QC, then the submenus of four QC programs will pop up for you to select.
L-J
The menu structure of the L-J QC program is shown in Figure 2-16.
2-16
System Structure
Figure 2-16 Menu structure of the L-J QC program
2-17
System Structure
X-B
The menu structure of the X-B QC program is shown in Figure 2-17.

X-B
Settings
Set Limits
Have Preset
Values
Restore
Defaults
Save
Print
Graph
Delete
Calculate
Preset Values
Save Preset
Values
Print
Pos./Total
List
Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total
Figure 2-17 Menu structure of the X-B QC program
The menu structure of the X QC program is shown in Figure 2-18.
2-18
System Structure
Figure 2-18 Menu structure of the X QC program
2-19
System Structure
X -R
The menu structure of the X -R QC program is shown in Figure 2-19.
X -R
Settings
Save
Print
Run
Start
Print
Pos./Total
Graph
Delete
New Vial
Data Compare
Display order
Outliers
Print
Pos./Total
Table
Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total
Figure 2-19 Menu structure of the X -R QC program
6. Service screen
The Service screen contains screens of Maintenance, Status, Self-test, Debug,
Log, Counter and Version and Config. Information. The menu structures of these
2-20
System Structure
screens are shown below.
Maintenance screen
The menu structure of the Maintenance screen is shown in Figure 2-20.
2-21
System Structure
Figure 2-20 Menu structure of the Maintenance screen
2-22
System Structure
Status screen
The menu structure of the Status screen is shown in Figure 2-21.
Status
Temperature&Pressure
Export
Print
Voltage&Current
Export
Print
Sensor
Export
Print
Signal Collection
Export
Print
Figure 2-21 Menu structure of the Status screen
Self-test screen
The menu structure of the Self-test screen is shown in Figure 2-22.
2-23
System Structure
Figure 2-22 Menu structure of the Self-test screen
2-24
System Structure
Debug screen
The menu structure of the Debug screen is shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Menu structure of the Debug screen
Counter screen
The menu structure of the Counter screen is shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Menu structure of the Counter screen
Log screen
The menu structure of the Log screen is shown in Figure 2-25
2-25
System Structure
Figure 2-25 Menu structure of the Log screen
Version and Config. Information screen
The menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen is shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen
2-26
System Structure
7. Setup screen
The Setup screen contains screens of Gain, Data Format, Reagent, Auxiliary, Para.
Unit, Ref. Range, Print, Auto Maintenance, User and Password and Advanced.
The menu structure of the Setup screen is shown in Figure 2-27.
2-27
System Structure
SETUP
Date Format
Reagent
Auxiliary
Para. Unit
Apply
Ref. Range
Print
Ok
Communication
RUO
Cancel
Gain
Auto Maintenance
Autoloader
Barcode Info.
Lab Info.
Ok
Cancel
Advanced
Maintenance
User and
Password
New
Edit
Delete
Reset Password
Change Password
Close
Figure 2-27 Menu structure of the Setup screen
8. Statistics screen
2-28
System Structure
The menu structure of the Statistics screen is shown in Figure 2-28.
Calculate
Workload
STATISTICS
Statistical
Condition
Re-fill
Statistical
Item
Statistics
Workload
Summary
Adjust Order
Print
Calculate
Charge
Statistical
Condition
Re-fill
Statistics
Charge
Summary
Adjust Order
Print
Figure 2-28 Menu structure of the Statistics screen
9. Shortcut Code screen

The menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen is shown in Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 Menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen
10. Calibration screen

The menu structure of the Calibration screen is shown in Figure 2-30.
2-29
System Structure
Figure 2-30 Menu structure of the Calibration screen
11. Help info.

The menu structure of the Help screen is shown in Figure 2-31.
HELP
Contents
Service
Review
Search
Daily
Operations
Print
Setup
Calibration
QC
Figure 2-31 Menu structure of the Help screen
12. Shutdown
The menu structure of Shutdown is shown in Figure 2-32.
2-30
System Structure
SHUTDOWN
Sleep
Shutdown
Figure 2-32 Menu structure of Shutdown
13. Exit
The menu structure of Exit is shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Menu structure of EXIT
2.5.2 Passwords
The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator (set by the user at
the User and Password screen) and service engineer (user name: service, and password:
Se s700. Note: there is a space between e and s). An administrator is enabled to have all
the authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is enabled to have all the authorities
of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for each level of user.
Table 2-1 Authorities enabled for the common user level

Level
Common
Module
Worklist
Screen
Authorities enabled
Worklist
Users of three levels are enabled with all
User
the authorities of the worklist screen, which

including:
Delete,
New,
Save,
Search,
Insert,
Hide,
Select(Deselect), Browse, Copy and

Print.
2-31
System Structure
Count
All
screens
except the QC
Run
Users of three levels are all enabled with

the authority of running samples.
and
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test
and
Debug);
as
well
as
the
Run screen
Review
Graph
Data/Graph,
Saving
of
DIFF,
Print,
Pos./Total, Lock, Data Browse (the buttons

of Validate, Edit Result and Restore
Result are available, but when you click
them, a message box will pop up for
authority identification.)
Saving of the Microscopic Exam. and
Others screen, Print, Pos./Total, Lock,
Data Browsing and Setup of blood ESR ref.
range.
TABLE
Save, Print, Communication, Deselect,

Search, Trend Graph (cannot be printed),
CV (cannot be printed), arrow buttons
above the Pos./Total control (the buttons
of Validate, Batch Validate, Edit
Result
and
Restore
Result
are
available, but when you click them, a

message box will pop up for authority
identification.)
Data Export
Data Export
Data Backup
Data Backup
Compare
Search and re-fill patient information,

adjust
and
print
parameters
in
the
comparison summary, adjust and print

parameters in the result trend.
Auto-backup
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
Auto-restore
2-32
System Structure
QC
L-J
L-J QC setup: browse file information of

different lot No.(but can not edit the QC
settings), Print
L-J QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup,
Data
Export,
History
and
Pos./Total
X-B
X-B QC setup: browse the information of

the screen but no edit allowed, Print
X-B QC graph: Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Print and Pos./Total
X-B QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup,
Data
Export,
History
and
Pos./Total
X QC setup: browse file information of

settings), Print
X QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
X QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,

Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
X QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup,
Pos./Total
2-33
Data
Export,
History
and
System Structure
X -R
X -R QC setup: browse file information of

settings), Print
X -R QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
X -R QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display
Order,
Outliers,
Print
and
Pos./Total
X -R QC table: Print, Communication,
Data Backup, Data Export, History and

Pos./Total
Service
Maintenance
Replace
Reagent
(All
Reagents
unavailable), Clean, (Empty WBC Bath,

Empty RBC Bath, Empty DIFF Bath
all unavailable), Maintain the whole device
Status
Analyzer
Information unavailable at the Print

message
box),
Voltage&Current
(Analyzer Information unavailable at the

Print and Export message boxes)
Self-test
Self-test
for
syringes
and
sampling
mechanism, valves and others

Counter
Check and print all the information
Log
Check, print and see details of logs

including Set Paras, Other Logs and
All Logs
Version
Setup
and
Check, export and print the information of
Config.
the Version and Config. Information
Information
screen
General
Date
Format
(Authority unavailable)
Format,
Reagent,
Auxiliary
1. Check the information of the User list

screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset
User
and
Password
password are disabled.

2. When log in as a common user, the
password of the current login user can be
modified.
2-34
System Structure
Statistics
Lab
Check the Lab information, but not allowed
Information
to edit
Select
Calculate
Calibration
Shutdown
Exit
set
statistical
summaries
Calculate
Set calculate conditions, adjust and print
Charge
charge summaries
Department
Check
Deliverer
Check
Diagnosis
Check
Gender
Check
Calibration
Browse and print user calibration factors
Factor
Help
items,
conditions, adjust and print workload
Workload
Shortcut Code
statistical
Help
Check the help information

Perform
Shutdown
the
Sleep
and
Shutdown
procedures
Exit
Log out and exit the system
Table 2-2 Authorities enabled for the administrator level

Level
Administrator
Module
Screen
Worklist
Worklist
Run
All
Authorities enabled
screens
except the QC
Run
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test
and
Debug)
and
Calibration
Review
Graph
Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit

Result and Restore Result
Table
Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and

Delete
Data Export
2-35
System Structure
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC
L-J
L-J QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set

limits, get preset values
L-J QC count
L-J QC graph: Delete
L-J QC table: Delete
X-B
X-B QC setup: Edit QC files, get preset

values, restore defaults, save
X-B QC graph: Delete
X-B QC table: Delete
X QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set
limits, get preset values

X QC count
X QC graph: Delete
X QC table: Delete
X -R
X -R QC setup: edit QC files, save
X -R QC count
X -R QC graph: Delete
X -R QC table: Delete
Service
Maintenance
Status
(Analyzer
Information
available
at
the
Print
message
box),
Voltage&Current
(Analyzer Information available at the

Print message box)
Self-test
Counter
Log
Check, print and see the details of the

Error Info.
Version
and
Config.
Information
2-36
System Structure
Authority setting items of the Auxiliary
Setup
screen
General Setup
Check and set the parameters of screens

including Para. Unit, Ref. Range, Print,
Communication, RUO, Auto Maintenance,
Autoloader and Barcode Info.
User
and
Password
of all users and change the administrators

own password
Lab
Check and edit the Lab Information
Information
Shortcut Code
Statistics
New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords
New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code
Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge
Shortcut Code
Calibration
Department
New, Edit and Delete
Deliverer
Diagnosis
Gender
Calibration
Save and restore the User Calibration
Factors
Factors (all the User Calibration Factors)

1. Calibration in the CT-CBC+DIFF mode
Calibrator
2. Calibrate one or more parameters

among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
1. Fresh Blood calibration in the CT-WB
Fresh Blood
and CT-PD Mode;

among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
Help
Help
Shutdown
Shutdown
Exit
Exit
Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for the service engineer level

Level
Service
Module
Worklist
Screen
Authorities enabled
Worklist
2-37
System Structure
Engineer
Run
All
screens
except the QC
Run
Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test
and
Debug)
and
Calibration
Review
Graph
Special Info.
Table
Trend graph (can be printed), CV (can be

printed), Optical
Data Export
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC
L-J
X-B
X
X -R
Service
Maintenance
1. Replace All Reagents

2. Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and
Empty DIFF Bath at the Maintenance
screen
Status
(Analyzer
Information available at the Export

message
box),
Voltage&Current
(Analyzer Information available at the

Export message box), Sensor, Signal
collection
and
Export
the
Analyzer
Information
Self-test
Counter
Initialize the number of times that each

item
has
been
calculated
except
the Sample Count Times (samples in

QC, calibration, background counts and
reliability tests not included)
2-38
System Structure
Log
Export, Save, Print and see Details of Set

Paras, Other Logs, All Logs, Error
Info. and RunSequence
Debug
Version
Debug
and
Config.
Information
Setup
Edit FS, SS and SF values of the Gain

General Setup
screen; set the value for Auto prompt

when n samples were run at the Auto
Maintenance screen
User
and
Password
Lab
Information
Shortcut Code
Advanced
Statistics
Maintain
Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge
Shortcut Code
Department
Deliverer
Diagnosis
Gender
Calibration
Import and Export User Calibration Factors

and Factory Calibration Factors, Restore
Calibration
Defaults, Save, Restore (All the Factory
Factors
Calibration Factors and Factory Transfer

Factors), Print
1. Factory calibrator calibration in the
WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and
PD-CBC+DIFF mode.
Calibrator

among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and
MPV.
Help
Help
2-39
System Structure
Shutdown
Shutdown
Exit
Exit
2-40
Instrument Installation and Software

Upgrade
3.1 Preparations
3.1.1 Purpose
Install the instrument and update the software properly as per the procedures introduced in this
chapter.
3.1.2 Tools
Blade or clipper
USB flash drive
Pipette (200l)
Cross-headed screwdriver
Thermometer with a probe
The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the
analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.
3.1.3 Accessories
Plastic test tube
Glass Pipette
7m standard particles
Gloves
Tissues
Controls (high and normal level)
Do prepare the 7m standard particles firstly to proceed with the later

confirmation work of the optical gain.
3-1
Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade
3.2 Installation Requirements

3.2.1 Space Requirements
Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the analyzer
itself, arrange for:
at least 100 cm on both left and right sides;
at least 50 cm behind;
enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the diluent, rinse and waste
containers
3.2.2 Power Requirements

1. Make sure the analyzer is properly grounded. Before turning on the analyzer, make sure
the input voltage meets the requirements.
2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be
unreliable.
Please place the analyzer near the electrical outlet to avoid using the
plug-board.
3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the analyzer. Using other electrical wire
may damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results.
Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V
Input power: 300 VA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
3.2.3 Environment Requirements

The installation environment of analyzer must meet the following requirements:
1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 - 30
2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 %
3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa
4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud
noises, pollution and electrical interference.
5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this
analyzer. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use
this analyzer in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.
6. Do not place the analyzer near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and
electrical contacts that regularly open and close.
7. Do not place the analyzer on a slope.
8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the analyzer in direct sunlight
or in front of a source of heat or drafts.
3-2
Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements.

Otherwise, the performance of the analyzer might be affected.
3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements

1. Startup the computer, then right-click My Computer and select Properties to enter the
property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the
computer here. They should meet the following requirements:
Operation system Windows 2000 Professional + SP4, Windows XP Home/XP
Professional + SP2 or Windows Vista.
RAM256MB at least
Figure 3-1 Checking Properties of My computer
3-3
Operating
system
RAM
Figure 3-2 System properties

2. Right-click the desktop and select Properties, and then click the Settings tag to enter
the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should
meet the following requirements:
Resolution1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure 3-4)
Figure 3-3 Checking Properties of desktop
3-4
Screen resolution
Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution

3. Double-click My Computer to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the
space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements:
Hard disk space4GB available on one disk at least.
Disk space
Figure 3-5 My computer

Then, close these 3 dialog boxes.
3-5
The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the

foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.
If the operating system on the external PC is Windows 2000 Professional

+SP4, the software for the analyzer can only be installed successfully after
installing the Windows2000-KB835732 patch of the corresponding language.
To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, you should copy the

installation files from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a
CD-ROM, and then copy the files to the PC for installation through U drive.
To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, install or update the software
using the CD directly. To connect to the LIS, the PC should be configured
with two network cards.
3-6
3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking

3.3.1 Checks before unpacking
Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.
3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit

1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before
unpacking.
Figure 3-6 External package of main unit

2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box
shown in the figure below.
Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover

3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.
3-7
Figure3-8 Remove accessory box

4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.
Figure3-9 Remove carton

5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a
countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.
Figure 3-10 Lift main unit
3-8
When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible and avoid strong
impact.
3.3.3 Checking packing list

Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.
3-9
3.4 Removal and Installation

1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the
sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11
shows.
Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp
2. When using the tubes of 1475mmor 1575mmmodel, you should disassembly
the adapter from the rack to load the tubes. Disassembly as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Remove the adapter from the tube rack

3. To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, the installation files should be copied
from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a CD-ROM, and then plug the
flash drive to the USB interface of the PC for installation and open the folder with
3-10

installation files. To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, put the installation CD
directly into the CD-ROM.and open the folder with instaltion files. Copy the installation files
from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB interface and then open the
installation folder.
4. Check if there is any software of other hematology analyzer on the PC. If there is, uninstall
the software or database before installation, and then double-click Setup.exe to install
the software. Select the language from the pull-down list in the pop-up message box, and
then click OK to continue installing, as shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Language selecting

5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto
Hematology Analyzer. You can click Browse to change the directory if necessary. Then,
click Next to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14 Selecting directory

6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being
installed.
3-11
Figure 3-15 Progress bar

7. When the installation of the software is finished, a message box shown in Figure 3-16 will
pop up. Click Next to install the necessary components and database.
Figure 3-16 Continuing installing

8. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-17 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept to continue installing.
3-12
Figure 3-17 Installing .NET Framework 2.0

9. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-18 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept button to continue installing.
3-13
Figure 3-18 Installing Windows Installer 3.1

10. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-19 will pop up while installing, please click
the Accept to continue installing.
3-14
Figure 3-19 Installing SQL

11. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-20 will pop up while installing, please click
the Install button to continue installing.
Figure 3-20 Installing VC++ R L

12. A progress bar Installing XXX shown in Figure 3-21 will pop up while installing the
components. Please be patient and wait as it may take longer time.
3-15

13. After part of the components is installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-22 may pop up.
You should click Yes to restart the computer and the installation program may continue
automatically after restarting.
Figure 3-22 Restarting the PC

14. When finish installing the components, the database will be installed automatically as
shown in Figure 3-23 .
Figure 3-23 Installing database
3-16

15. When the installation is complete, a message box shown in Figure 3-24 will pop up. Click
Close to close the box and the entire software installation procedure is finished.
Figure 3-24 Installation complete
If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you
should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in
3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.
16. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC.
17. The BC-5380 consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only basic interactive
keys like the [RUN] and [OPEN] keys are located on the main unit. The rest of the
operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one
connecting the BC-5380 and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g.
LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons
of Local Area Connection for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to
configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC:
(1) Right click My Network Places and select Properties from the pop-up dialog box.
3-17
Figure 3-25 Right clicking Network neighbor

(2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select Properties. In the pop-up message
box, select the check box of Show icon in notification area when connected and Notify
me when this connection has limited or no connectivity, and then click OK. Repeat this
procedure to set the other network interface.
Figure 3-26 Connection properties

(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
and then click Properties. At the pop-up screen, select Use the following IP address, and
then enter 10.0.0.1 into the IP address box and 255.0.0.0 into the Subnet mask box, as
shown in Figure 3-27 .
3-18
Figure 3-27 Setting IP address

(4) Then, click OK to save all the settings.
Never set the Default gateway and DNS server for the network interface
(10.0.0.1) connecting the BC-5380. Otherwise, you may not access to the
network connecting the other network interface.
If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the

other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the
IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the BC-5380) is not applied to other computers
or computers in the other network.
18. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows
to check and set the IP for the LIS computer.
(1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click My Network Places and select
Properties from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-28 .
3-19
Figure 3-28 Network Neighbor (LIS computer)

(2) Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties, as shown in Figure
3-29 .
Figure 3-29 Connection properties

Then, the following box will pop up:
3-20
Figure 3-30 Connection properties (LIS computer)

(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, double click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to enter the following screen.
3-21
Figure 3-31 Setting IP address

(4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP
information on the BC-5380.
(5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway
and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically.
Then, click OK to save the settings.
The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.
3-22
3.5 Connections
1. See Figure 3-32 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the
M-53LEO(I) lyse, M-53LEO(II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a
plane of the same level, and the M-53D diluent, M-53 cleanser, and waste containers
should be placed under the countertop.
Figure 3-32 Connections of reagent and waste containers
Make sure the M-53LEO (I) lyse, M-53LEO (II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and M-53
cleanser are placed on the same level as the analyzer.
Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated.

See Figure 3-33 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube
connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.
3-23
Figure 3-33 linking wires and lines
2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the
power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a
power outlet.
Figure 3-34 Connection of PC and power supply
3. Connect the BC-5380 with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-35 .
3-24
Figure 3-35 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer
Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the IPU computer and the
LIS computer.
The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug
them to IPU computer and the LIS computer respectively at will. Please see
appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a
direct-connected network cable.
4. There are two ways to connect the BC-5380 and the LIS computer.
(1) Connect the BC-5380 with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-36 .
Figure 3-36 Connecting the IPU computer and the LIS computer
Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS
computer.
The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the
two computers respectively.
(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-37 .
3-25
Figure 3-37 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN
Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU

computer to the LAN.
The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged

into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router,
etc.) respectively.
Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the
hospital or doctors requirement.
5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power
cord properly.
3-26
3.6 Start-up
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup
Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure
3-38. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.
Marks on relieve valve
Figure 3-38 Marks on relieve valve

1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are
not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling
assembly), as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Sampling and probe wipe tubing

2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure
the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged, as Figure 3-40 shows.
3-27
Check and make sure

the tubes connecting
the V25, V26 and the
tee-connector of the
volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged
Figure 3-40 Tubing free from bending and clogging

3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as
Figure 3-41 shows.
Check and make

sure the thick 50
tube
connecting
the V27 is not
bended
and
clogged
Figure 3-41 Tubing free from bending and clogging

4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are
in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-42 .
3-28
Two-way
connector
Tube 1
Tee connector
Figure 3-42 Checking the pinch valve
3.6.2 Start up for the first time
1. Turn on the analyzer, wait a moment and then a prompt
will appear
on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the
BC-5380 already. Similarly, if the other prompt
appears on the
task bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesnt connect the
BC-5380, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all
then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the

BC-5380 from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then,
plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface.
2. Double click the BC-5380 Hematology Analyzer icon on the desktop of the IPU
computer to start up the software. Then, enter the user name service and the password
Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the login box, as shown in
Figure 3-43 , and then click OK to initialize the analyzer.
3-29
Figure 3-43 Logging in

3. During the initialization, a dialog box Skip fluidic initialization? will pop up. Click No to
continue the initialization.
Figure 3-44 Skip fluidic initialization?

4. When initialization is finished, click Menu Setup Communication to enter the
screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click Ok to save the
settings.
3-30
Figure 3-45 Communication setup
The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer
connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the
interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server
cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.
5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is
working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting.
6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the LIS
icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-46, indicating you can start
transmitting data now.
3-31
Figure 3-46 LIS communication
The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU

software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU
software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect
after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the
connection will be established and ready for communication.
The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable;
connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or
exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices
like routers.
3.6.3 Inspection after Startup

1. Click Menu Service Version and Config. Information, as shown in Figure 3-47 to
enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-48.
3-32
Figure 3-47 Menu option
Figure 3-48 Version and config. Info.

2. Check and make sure the following items are the correct and specified version: Boot
Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board MCU,
Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure 3-48, and
then close the message box.
3-33
The specified version here means the PC end software should be complied
with that of the main unit end. Upgrade the main unit end software to match
the PC end software if necessary.
3-34
3.7 Setup and Adjustment

3.7.1 Setting Parameters
1. At the main screen, click MenuSetupReagent to enter the reagent screen where
you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-49.
Figure 3-49 Clicking Reagent

2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: Diluent, LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II)
Lyse, LH Lyse and Cleanser.
3-35
Figure 3-50 Setting the expiration date

3. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in
Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-51 Entering Advance screen
3-36
Figure 3-52 Advance screen

4. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen, as shown in Figure 3-52, and the
Ambient Temp. Calibration screen will pop up. Put the thermometer to about 5cm from
the right side of the analyzer (do not touch the analyzer). Read the measured value after 1
minute and enter it in the blank box at the screen. Click Calculate New Difference to get
the new deviation, and then click Ok to go back to the Advanced screen, as shown in
Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Ambient Temp. Calibration screen

5. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen to go to the Ambient Temp.
Calibration screen;
6. Read the measured temperature after 1 minute and make sure the deviation of the value
measured by the analyzer from that by the thermometer should be less than 1. If not,
readjust the ambient temperature until the deviation is less than 1.
7. Input the ambient temperature measured by the analyzer and the thermometer, and then
3-37

click Ok at the Ambient Temp. Calibration screen to go to the Advanced screen.
Click Ok to close the Advanced screen.
3.7.2 Adjusting Position

1. Press the [RUN] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once.
2. At the graph review screen, click the Special info. button as shown in Figure 3-54 to
enter the special information screen shown in Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-54 Clicking Special info.
Figure 3-55 Special info. Screen

3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the
background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-55.
3-38

Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board.
Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the RBC Start signal delay is
within [4, 5.5]. If they are found out of the limit, fine adjust the distance between the tee
connector under the volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board
according to the WBC and RBC Start signal delay, as shown in Figure 3-56. When WBC
start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube downwards; When
WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube upwards;
When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric tube
downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 5.5s, stop adjusting the RBC
volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit,
do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values
are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile,
check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special
info. message box.
Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly.
Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector
may leak and the volumetric tube may be broken.
Figure 3-56 Distance under the volumetric tube

4. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in
Figure 3-58.
3-39
Figure 3-57 Entering Advance screen
Figure 3-58 Advance screen

5. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously
complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-58. Enter the
recorded mean time if the time displayed doesnt comply with the recorded one.
3-40
3.8 Testing Other Functions

Click MenuSetupPrint to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between
the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-59.
Select printer
Click OK
Figure 3-59 Print Setup
3-41
3.9 Confirming Gain

3.9.1 HGB blank voltage
After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary.
1. Entering the setup screen
At the main screen, click Menu SetupGain to enter the screen.
HGB gain
HGB blank
voltage
Figure 3-60 Setup screen

2. Confirming the HGB gain
You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall
be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust:
At the Gain screen, click the adjusting button of the HGB current value to set the HGB
blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.
3.9.2 Gain of Optical System

After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust:
1. At the Graph screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF and then perform the
background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified
3-42

requirement.
2. At the Table review screen, select the background record run previously, and then click
Optical to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-62 .
SS 0.1max total
FS 0.1max total
Click Calculate
Click OK

3. Click Calculate, and then make sure the calculated FS and SS 0.1max total (the larger
3-43

number) is less than 50. Otherwise, you should clean the flow cell and DIFF bath at the
Maintenance screen. Then, repeat steps 1 to 3 until the number of FS and SS 0.1max
particles are less than 50. Then, click Ok to back to the main screen, as shown in Figure
3-62.
4. Run the calibrator on the analyzer. Select the test results from the Graph review screen,
and click Optical to go to the Optical screen. Click Calculate, and then check if the
gravity center position of FS and SS meet the following requirements (choose the one
have more particles within the FS 0.1max range): the FS gravity center should locate
within 0.57 of the low angle target peak; the SS gravity center should locate within 0.63
of the high angle target peak
5. If the position of FS and SS gravity centers do not meet the requirements, input the FS and
SS gain target values of the corresponding particle at the Optical screen, and then get
the gain values, as shown in Figure 3-63
Figure 3-63 Optical screen

6. Click Ok to close the Optical screen, and then click Menu SetupGain. Confirm
the values in the FS and SS boxes are the same with the FS and SS gain values. If not,
input the recorded FS and SS gain values as current FS and SS values, and then click
Ok to exit the screen, as shown in Figure 3-64
3-44
Figure 3-64 Setting optical gains

7. At the Graph review screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF. Then, prepare
the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into
1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.
Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample.
Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.
8. When finish running, enter the Table screen and select the standard particle sample just
run, and then click the Optical button, as shown in Figure 3-65.
3-45
Figure 3-65 Table review screen

9. At the Optical screen, click the Calculate button. Check if the following requirements
are met: FS gravity center within (16.68, 19.42); SS gravity center within (100.56, 107.92);
SS 0.1max width 15.21, and then click OK to exit the optical screen.
10. If the gravity center and the 0.1max width of the standard particle do not meet the
requirements, fine tune the FS and SS gain values at the Gain screen. Run the calibrator
and the 7um standard particles, until the following requirements are met: for the calibrator,
the gravity center of the low angle should be within 1.51; the gravity center of the high
angle should be within 2.4 from the target values; for the 7um standard particles, the
gravity center of low angle should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); gravity center of high
angle should be 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angle width 6.50, high angle width of
7um standard particles 15.21. If these requirements are met, name and save the values.
3-46
3.10 Calibration and Performance Test

3.10.1
Background Count
Back to the Graph screen and perform the background count in WB-CBC+DIFF mode. The
background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:0.1109/L, RBC:0.031012/L,
HGB:1g/L, HCT:0.5%, PLT:5109/L.
3.10.2
Carryover
Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operators Manual to make sure the
carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:
3.10.3
Parameter
Carryover
WBC
0.5
RBC
0.5
HGB
0.6
HCT
0.5
PLT
1.0
Reproducibility
In the AL-WB-CBC+DIFF mode, AL-WB-CBC mode, CT-PD-CBC+DIFF mode and

CT-PD-CBC mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the requirements
specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operators Manual
The CV requirements for whole blood mode:
Para.
Condition
CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)
WBC
(6.015.0)109/L
2.0%
12
RBC
(4.006.00)10 /L
1.5%
HGB
(110180)g/L
1.5%
MCV
(80110)fL
1.0%
PLT
(150500)10 /L
4.0%
The CV requirements for predilute mode:

Para.
Condition
CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)

9
WBC
(6.015.0)10 /L
4.0%
RBC
(4.006.00)1012/L
3.0%
HGB
(110180)g/L
3.0%
MCV
(80110)fL
2.0%
PLT
(150500)109/L
8.0%
3-47
3.10.4
Calibration
1. Click MenuCalibration, and then click Calibrator to enter the screen. Select the
calibration mode as Whole Blood; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the
calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into
the table.
Figure 3-66 Calibration (WB)

2. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample
compartment and put the calibrator into the compartment. Close the compartment door
manually, and then press the [RUN] key, as Figure 3-67 shows. When you hear the beep,
the analyzer is starting to run automatically.
3-48
Figure 3-67 Calibrator sampling
Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (1 ml at
least).
3. Repeat running the calibrator for 11 times as instructed by Step 2.Then, click the Start
button. The setup of whole blood calibration factors is completed. Click Diluent and a
message box will pop up. Put the tube into the tube holder and put the loaded tube holder
into the sample compartment, and then close the compartment door manually. Then press
the [RUN] key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-68 shows. Dispense the diluent
into the tube for 6 times consecutively. Then click the Cancel button to close the
message box. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment and take out the
tube and the tube holder.
3-49
Click
Diluent
Then click
Cancel
Figure 3-68 Dispensing diluent

4. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120L and load the tip, and then aspirate the
calibrator, as Figure 3-69 shows.
Figure 3-69 Pipette

5. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator
into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-70 shows.
3-50
Figure 3-70 Mix the sample

6. Go back to the Calibrator screen, and then select the calibration mode as Predilute
and enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC,
RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into the table.
Figure 3-71 Calibration (PD)

7. Present the vial of calibrator well mixed as instructed by Step 6 into the tube holder, and
3-51

then put the loaded tube holder into the sample compartment. Close the compartment door,
and then press the [RUN] key. When you hear the beep, the analyzer is starting to run
automatically.
Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (at least
1ml).
8. Running the calibrator consecutively for 11 times as instructed by Step 8. The setup of
predilute calibration factors is completed.
3.10.5
Linearity
See installation verification report of the BC-5380.
3-52
3.11 Software upgrade

3.11.1
Upgrading the PC installed software
We only update the IPU software provided that it has been completely installed on the PC. The
update will not change users custom configuration including settings and database. Follow the
following steps to update the software:
1. Double-click the setup. exe icon to launch the update program;

2. A window will pop up as shown in Figure 3-72;
Figure 3-72 Selecting the updating mode
3. Click Next to go to the installation screen shown in Figure 3-73;
4. When the program finishes the installation, a message box shown in Figure 3-74 will pop
up;
3-53
Figure 3-74 Prompting to update the database
5. Click the Next button to update the database, as shown in Figure 3-75;
Figure 3-75 Installing database files
6. When all the database files are installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-76 will prompt
3-54

the completion of installation.
Figure 3-76 Finishing installation
To update the Version 1.3 BC-5100 software, select the Install mode to
install the new version in the previous folder rather than update the outdated
software.
If the system prompts for not enough space on disk during installation,
select another disk to install and make sure the free space on that disk is at
least 4G.
3.11.2
Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer)
1. Click MenuAll ProgramsBC-5380 Auto Hematology AnalyzerAnalyzer

Upgrade to launch the update software;
Before perform this step, make sure that the analyzer is powered on for at
least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the connection to the main unit may fail after
reboot or the update server may be uploaded again after being connected to
the main unit.
3-55
Figure 3-77 Client update software interface

For PC using Windows Vista, the IPU software or the update client may loose connection to
the main unit after reboot. Right click on the Analyzer Upgrade item and choose Run as
administrator to solve this problem, as shown in Figure 3-78;
Figure 3-78 Running the update client in Windows Vista

2. Click Analyzer Upgrade shown in Figure 3-77 and a message box will pop up. Enter the
user name service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e
and s) in the message box, as shown in Figure 3-79;
3-56
Figure 3-79 Logging in the client update software

3. Ensure proper connection between the PC (IPU software end) and the analyzer (main unit
end). If the connection fails, a message box shown in Figure 3-80 will pop up;
Figure 3-80 Connection failure message box

If the connection is proper, the update software will automatically check if the version of the
update server is suitable. If the version meets the requirement, Step 4 will be skipped;
otherwise, the update software will upload the latest update server files to the analyzer, as
shown in Figure 3-81;
Figure 3-81 Automatically uploading the update server to the analyzer

4. After the update server files have been uploaded successfully, you will be asked to restart
the main unit. Click Ok to restart, as shown in Figure 3-82;
3-57
Figure 3-82 Reboot message box
At this time, the update program has already been disconnect from the
analyzer, so Step 1 and 2 should be performed again to launch the update
program.
After the update server program being successfully updated and main unit
being rebooted, wait 2 minutes before logging on to the client.
5. After logging on, a message box shown in Figure 3-83 will pop up, asking you to choose
the directory of the update files;
Figure 3-83 Selecting the directory of the update files (1)

6. Click Browse in the message box shown in Figure 3-83 and select the update
package folder step1 (or other names as defined) generated by the installation CD as the
target directory, as shown in Figure 3-84;
3-58

7. Click Ok and the directory will be displayed in the box. Check if the displayed directory is
correct, as shown in Figure 3-85;

8. Click Ok to start uploading update files to the main unit, as shown in Figure 3-86;
Figure 3-86 Uploading the update files
3-59
During uploading the update files, if the message box of Analyzer

disconnected! Can not upgrade the analyzer! pops up, check if the selected
folder is correct, and then perform the update procedures again.
9. After finishing uploading, a message box of successful uploading shown in Figure 3-87 will
pop up;
Figure 3-87 Uploading files successfully
The uploading process takes 1 to 2 minutes according to the size of the

update files.
10. Click Ok and wait for a while. A message box will pop up to show the items to be updated,
as shown in Figure 3-88;
3-60
Figure 3-88 Items to be updated

11. Click Ok to start updating, as shown in Figure 3-89;
During installation, if a message box of Disconnected from the analyzer.

Unable to finish updating! Please connect the analyzer and the PC end
software and try to update again. pops up, do not switch off the power
supply of the analyzer and restart the updating process from the beginning
after 5 minutes.
3-61

12. Click Ok in the message box prompting successful update, and then switch off and
restart the analyzer;
13. Update the folder step2 (including the main unit software, configuration files and fluidic
sequence) according to the same process, and then switch off the analyzer;
14. Use the screwdriver to remove the three cross-headed screws to open the top cover, and
then open the right door. Connect the J3 interface of the data board and the J11 interface
of the autoloader board using a dedicated cord, and then restart the main unit.
Use the dedicated cord in the accessory box provided by the manufacturer.
15. Update the folder step4 (including the hardware writing software) according to the same
process, and then switch off the analyzer.
Do not delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before updating and keep the
power supply of the main unit on. Always update the hardware after Step2 is
updated successfully.
After
replacing
the
data
board
(including
rootfs,
material
code:
051-000014-00), remember to perform all the steps to update the software at

the main unit end.
3-62
Fluidic System
4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts

4.1.1 Piercing needle
Pierces the evacuated blood collection tube; aspirates and dispenses the blood sample.
4.1.2 Probe Wipe

Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe
4.1.3 Pumps
P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber.
P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum.
P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.
4.1.4 Syringes
Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 l; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates
the second diluted sample.
Diluent-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and
supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.
Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo
(I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.
Sheath-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the
flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.
Sample-Syringe: full volume 250l; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.
4.1.5 Valves
Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow
direction.
Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.
Pressure switch: monitors the pressure of the DIFF channel.
4.1.6 Baths
WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.
RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and
4-1
Fluidic System
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.
DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.
Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by
impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.
Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.
WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference
4.1.7 Volumetric tube
WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample
RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample
4.1.8 Filters
Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube
Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube
P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.
4-2
Fluidic System
4.2 Fluidic System

4.2.1 Reagent volume required
Sample analysis for a single sample each time
2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode.
Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples
Reagents
Name
M-50 Diluent
M-53 Lyse
Volume of single analysis

CBC+DIFF
CBC
M-53D Diluent
45mL
34mL
M-53LEO(I) Lyse
1.1ml
M-53LEO(II) Lyse
0.135ml
M-53LH Lyse
0.5ml
Normal startup function (excluding background)
Reagents volume required:

Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally
Reagents
Name
Volume of normal startup
M-50 Diluent
M-53D Diluent
89ml
M-53LEO(I) Lyse
M-53LEO(II) Lyse
M-53LH Lyse
2ml
M-53 Cleanser
M-53 Lyse
Cleanser
Abnormal startup function (excluding background)

Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally
Reagents
Name
Volume of abnormal startup
M-50 Diluent
M-53D Diluent
172ml
M-53LEO(I) Lyse
M-53LEO(II) Lyse
M-53LH Lyse
2ml
M-53 Cleanser
M-53 Lyse
Cleanser
Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding
startup background)

4-3
Fluidic System
Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to
Ship procedure has been done)
Volume of starting up a
Reagents
drained system (after the
Name
prepare to ship procedure

has been done)
M-50 Diluent
M-53 Lyse
Cleanser
M-53D Diluent
207ml
M-53LEO(I) Lyse
12ml
M-53LEO(II) Lyse
12ml
M-53LH Lyse
12ml
M-53 Cleanser
8ml
Normal shutdown function

Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down
Reagents
Name
Volume of normal shutdown
M-50 Diluent
M-53D Diluent
53ml
M-53LEO(I) Lyse
M-53LEO(II) Lyse
M-53LH Lyse
M-53 Cleanser
29ml
M-53 Lyse
Cleanser
4-4
Fluidic System
4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing
Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)
Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)
4-5
Fluidic System
4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures
WBC Count/BASO channel
The reagents used include:
M-53LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs.
Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%
Diagrams: WBC histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:500
Metering volume: 500
Function description: 6l blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the
bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the
aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through
the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.
DIFF channel
LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations.
Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.
Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter
Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and

EOS%
Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram
Dilute ratio: 1:138
Metering volume: 127l
Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and
then 9l blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed and
reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.135ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample reacts
with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and the
sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample
syringe for measurement.
4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures
4-6
Fluidic System
RBC/PLT channel
Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells
Principles: Electrical Impedance Method
Parameters: RBC and PLT
Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram
Dilute ratio: 1:20000
Metering volume: 300l
Function description: 52.08l sample dilution (1:417.7) is aspirated by the sample probe
from the WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the
sample with 2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:20000. Then, the mixed
sample is driven into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood
cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is
measured by the volumetric tube.
4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures

HGB channel
Diluent: dilutes samples and washes

LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin
Principles: Colorimetry
Parameters: HGB
Dilute ratio: 1:500
The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through
the sample with the blank reference reading.
4-7
Fluidic System
4.3 Sequence
of
Whole
Blood
CBC+DIFF
Measurement
4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures
A.
Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath
20l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe from the sample tube, and then the
sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath.
The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses 9l sample.
B.
First Diluting
The sample probe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses 6l sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7
dilution.
C.
Cleaning the residual sample
The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual
sample.
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
D.
RBC second diluting
The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the diluent that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000
dilution.
E.
Sample probe returning to home position
The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe returns to the home position.
4-8
Fluidic System
E
Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-9
Fluidic System
4.3.2 DIFF Channel

Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples0 - 6s
During this period:
The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and then
the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the diluent.
1. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
2. During 2.8-3.8s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse
into the DIFF bath to clean it.
3. During 4.5-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath
and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample.
4. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.
Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s)

During this period:
1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 1.1ml pre-heated
LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe.
2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 9ul sample into
the DIFF bath.
3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by
bubbling.
4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.135ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is
dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe.
5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling.
6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF
bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is energized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The
sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath.
When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown
in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.
The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s)
During this period:
1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are energized. The sheath syringe dispenses the
diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath.
2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the
flow cell at a high speed.
3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample
4-10
Fluidic System
into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow
cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable
speed for measurement.
The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation
4-11
Fluidic System
Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement
Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s)

During this period:
1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and
the sample probe are washed.
2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24
keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation
tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF
bath.
3. Cleaning the DIFF bath
a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into
the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath.
b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 1.5ml diluent.
c.
Dispensing 1.5ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The
sheath syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.
4-12
Fluidic System
4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel

HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample
distribution (0-18.2s)
1. 5s HGB background test.
2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back
bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the
vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath.
4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the
WBC bath.
5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube
6. WBC sample distribution:

a. At 9.4s, valve V02, V03 are energized; and at 9s, V27is energized and the waste
pump operates. The sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the
diluent to clean the exterior of the sample probe.
b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is
energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the
WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then
descends into the WBC bath.
c.
Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 l sample into the
WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.
4-13
Fluidic System
Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s)

1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile
its exterior is washed.
2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe
dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling.
The system waits for the sample becoming stable.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the
vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -300HPa and -260HPa.
Counting and bath cleaning

1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
-300 to -260 HPa, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume
that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube..
2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 41s.
3. Cleaning the front bath twice.
4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the
diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and
enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent
flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath.
Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.
Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting
4-14
Fluidic System
Fi
gure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath
4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel

Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s)
1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the
back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create
the vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and
V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping.
3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3
operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.7s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample
is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-20.5s
period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.
4-15
Fluidic System
Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube
Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s)

1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio
of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the
sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time,
and the diluent syringe dispenses a certain amount of diluent into the RBC bath and then
the sample probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the
10ml diluent syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second
dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling
for three times.
Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)

The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples.
Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between
-300HP and -260HP.
Counting and bath cleaning

The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10.
1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
4-16
Fluidic System
-300 to -260 HP, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent
volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.
Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting
Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath
2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the
remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the
RBC bath for soaking.
4-17
Fluidic System
3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -300HP is created in the vacuum chamber.
Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are
discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized
to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.
4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement

In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The
sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.
4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement

In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are
also changed.
Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode
A.
Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath
15l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe, and then the sample probe ascends
meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3l sample into the probe
wipe.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6l sample into the WBC
bath.
B.
Cleaning the sample remains
The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the
residual sample..
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
C.
RBC second dilution
The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into
RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the diluent that is already there to form the
second dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
D.
Sample probe returning to home position
The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
4-18
Fluidic System
The sample probe returns to the home position.
Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe
4-19
Hardware System
The BC-5380 hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts, sensors,
switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.
Sample
drive
motors
Syringe
drive
motors
Heater
for optics
system
And
Temp.
sensors
Heater
for Diff
pool and
temp.
sensors
Ambie
nce
temp.
sensor
BC-5380
Hardware System
NetPort
Fan
Sensor on right door
Vavles and
pumps
Sensor on optics system
Volume mesure
board and press
sensors
Laser
board
Liquid level
sensor
SS
Pre-amp
board
Mother
Board
Jam drive motor
Feed drive motor
Auto-sample
board
FS
Pre-amp
board
Optics couple
sensor
Door driver
Key
Board
WBC Pole
Indication
Board
AC Power
Switch
Data Board
RBC Pole
Power
Supply
Board
Drive Board
HGB Module
Figure 5-1 BC-5380 hardware system structure
Note:
In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the
data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes
5-1
Hardware System
represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components.
The boards of the BC-5380 and their functions are shown in the table below.
Table 5-1 Boards of the BC-5380 and their functions
No.
1
Name
Data board
Functions
CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog
channel
Drive board
MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving +

Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and
pressure monitoring
Mother board
Power distribution and centralized wiring.

Plugboard supported
Laser control board
Laser creating and controlling
FS
Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle
pre-amplification
board
6
7
SS
scattered light
pre-amplification
Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle
board
scattered light
Volumetric board
Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and

WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure
sensors and amplifying the detected signals
Indicator board
Buzzer and indicator
Power board
Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A12V power

Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power
10
Liquid-level board
Liquid-level detection of reagents
11
Autoloader board
Sample
transport,
mix
electromagnetic valve control

12
Key board
[RUN] key and [OPEN] key
5-2
control,
Hardware System
5.1 Mother board

5.1.1 Introduction
The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board
input/output.
5.1.2 Board Composition

The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for
connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for
various input/output signals.
Function
Power interface
Slot for data board
Slot for drive board
Connectors for board signals (autoloader board, laser control board, pre-amp board,
volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)
Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module,
independent key, optics, etc.) signals
Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)
Block diagram
5-3
Hardware System
DB9(rs23
2)
RJ45
rs232 int.
driver
Isolate
transfoemer
Socket for suck key

and right door chec
ker
Socket for Indicator

and key board
Power filter
& indicator
Socket for laser

control board
Data borad power
Socket for valume

mesure and press
control board
Socktes for Data

Board
Sockets for pre-amp.

board
Socket for HGB
module
Sockets
for
Power
Supply
RS422 int
driver
Drive boatd power
Socket for Autosample
Sockets for
vavles,pumps,motors,heat
ers
Sockets for Drive

Board
Sockets for
optics sensor
Socket for fan
Socket
for
power( Autosa
mple board)
Socket for
Temp. sensor
Socket for
Liq.level
checker
Figure 5-2 Function of mother board
Interface definition
List of connectors
Table 5-2 List of connectors
SN.
PIN Number
Function Description
PA1
96
Data board connector, digital signals
PA2
96
Data board connector, analog signals
PB1
96
Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics signals
PB2
96
Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive
5-4
Hardware System
signals
PB3
96
Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves, pumps,

and heaters
J1
RS-232 LAN port
J2
Reserved for COM port debugging
J3
10
Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU

programs of autoloader board
J4
RS-422 COM port, COM port of autoloader board
J5
Connector for the key board and indicator board
J6
Right door switch, and optical shielding box switch
J7
Laser control board connector
J8
Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)
J9
side scatter channel (SS)
J10
Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)
J11
HGB module connector
J12
A+/- 12V connector
J13
AC120V connector
J14
Temperature sensor connector
J15
12
Volumetric board connector
J16
34
Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers
J17
No in use
J18
24
Connector for photocouplers 1-6
J19
24
Connector photocouplers 7-12
J20
24
Connector photocouplers 13-18
J21
Reserved for DC mix motor
J22
Connector stepping motors 1-2
J23
J24
J25
J26
No in use
J27
Connector for heater 2
J28
Connector for heater 1
J29
20
Connector for pumps 1-7
J30
20
Connector for valves 1-10
J31
20
J32
20
J33
20
J34
Fan connector
J35
10
Connector for P12V and P24V

5-5
Hardware System
J36
Connector for autoloader board power
J37
D+5V connector
Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)
Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors.

Connector type: AMP VME female connector
3*32PIN vertical connection
Model: 5535043-4
Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board
Column A
Column B
Column C
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
10
DGND
DGND
DGND
11
DGND
DGND
DGND
12
TP_TX+
PWFBOUT
TP_RX+
13
TP_TX-
DGND
TP_RX-
14
DGND
DGND
DGND
15
DGND
DGND
DGND
16
TMS_TO_DRV
TMS_TO_AS
UART3_TO_PC
17
TCK_TO_DRV
TCK_TO_AS
UART3_TO_DAT
18
DATA_TO_DRV
DATA_TO_AS
DGND
19
DATA_FROM_DRV
DATA_FROM_AS
DGND
20
DGND
UART1_TO_DAT+
UART1_TO_AS+
21
DGND
UART1_TO_DAT-
UART1_TO_AS-
22
UART0_TO_DRV
DGND
DGND
23
UART0_TO_DAT
DGND
DGND
24
DGND
DGND
#SUCK_KEY
25
DGND
#VM_ON
DGND
26
DGND
#RBC_START
#BUZ
27
DGND
#RBC_STOP
#COUNT_KEY
28
DGND
#WBC_START
FAULT
29
DGND
#WBC_STOP
READY
5-6
Hardware System
30
DGND
DGND
OPTI_DOOR
31
DGND
#LASER_ON
#RIGHT_DOOR
32
DGND
DGND
#INSERT_DOOR
Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board

Column A
Column B
Column C
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
LASER_CURT
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
10
AGND
AGND
AGND
11
AGND
NC
AGND
12
AGND
AGND
A GND
13
AGND
SS
AGND
14
AGND
AGND
AGND
15
AGND
FS
AGND
16
AGND
AGND
AGND
17
AGND
HGB_IN
AGND
18
AGND
AGND
AGND
19
AGND
HGB+
AGND
20
AGND
HGB-
AGND
21
AGND
A-12V
A-12V
22
AGND
A-12V
A-12V
23
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
24
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
25
AGND
A+12V
A+12V
26
NC
NC
NC
27
NC
A+70V
NC
28
NC
NC
NC
29
NC
NC
NC
30
NC
AC120_B
NC
31
NC
NC
NC
32
AC120_A
NC
NC
5-7
Hardware System
Connector J1 for LAN port
Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing

Model: 5406217-1
Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board
Definition
Description
ET_TP+
Transmit, positive
ET_TP-
Transmit, negative
ET_RP+
Receive, positive
ET-NGP
Receive, virtual ground
ET-NGP
ET_RP-
Receive, negative
ET-NGR
ET-NGR
Connector J2 for COM port
Connector type: DB9 male / female connector

Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector)
Pin
Definition
Description
NC
RXD/TXD
Send/receive
TXD/RXD
Receive/send
NC
GND
6-9
NC
Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector)

Pin
Definition
Description
GND
NC
TXD/RXD
Send/receive
RXD/TXD
Receive/send
5-9
NC
Connector J3 for JTAG
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES

Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX
5-8
Hardware System
Pin
Definition
Description
D3V3
GND
GND
TCK
JTAG clock
TMS
JTAG status select
DATA_FROM_AS
JTAG data to data board
DATA_TO_AS
JTAG data to drive board
NC
GND
10
NC
Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES

Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST'
Pin
Definition
#SUCK_KEY
GND
#RIGHT_DOOR
GND
OPTI_DOOR
GND
Description
NC
Right door switch on/off
optical shielding box switch
Connector J4 for autoloader board signal

Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST'
Pin
1
Definition
UART2_TO_AS+
Description
5474 serial port 2 to positive end of
sample board data
UART2_TO_AS-
5474 serial port 2 to negative end of

sample board data
UART2_TO_DAT+
sample board serial port to positive

end of 5474 serial port data
UART2_TO_DAT-
sample board serial port to negative

end of 5474 serial port data
5-9
Hardware System
Connector J5 for indicator board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8
TOP PHSERIES
Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM

Pin
Definition
Description
D+5V
#COUNT_KEY
Start sampling switch, effective low
#INSERT_DOOR
Insert STAT switch, effective low
FAULT
Fault status indicator light, effective high
READY
Ready status indicator light, effective high
NC
#BUZ
GND
Buzzer driven
Connector J7 for laser board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES

Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'
Pin
Definition
NC
AGND
LASER_CURT
A+12V
#LASER_ON
D+5V
Description
Laser current feedback, analog signal

Laser source on/off signal, effective low
Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES

Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST'
5-10
Hardware System
Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board
Pin
Definition
AGND
FS/SS
AGND
AGND
A-12V
AGND
A+12V
MHOLE
Description
FS/SS signal input, analog signal
Connecting inner shield of cable

Connecting external shield of cable
Connector J11 for HGB module

Pin
1
Definition
HGB+
Description
HGB
light
drive,
light
drive,
positive
2
HGB-
HGB
negative
HGB_IN
AGND
AGND
HGB feedback
Connector J12 for analog A12V
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial

Model: 1-794509-1 'JST'
Pin
Definition
AGND
NC
NC
NC
A+12V
AGND
AGND
A-12V
Connector J13 for AC120V

5-11
Description
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM
Pin
Definition
AC120V_A
NC
AC120V_B
Description
A end of 120V AC
B end of 120V AC
Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3
DIN41612, 96PIN female

Definition of PB1-PB3 signals:
Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left
side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be
arranged at the nearest joint side of board.
Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board
column A
column B
column C
HT1_SA
HT1_SB
AMBI_SA
HT2_SA
HT2_SB
AMBI_SB
POSI_PRESS
NEGA_PRESS
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
10
DGND
DGND
DGND
11
DGND
DGND
DGND
12
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
13
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
14
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
15
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
16
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
17
DGND
DGND
DGND
18
#LIQ1
#LIQ2
TMS_TO_DRV
19
#LIQ3
#LIQ4
TCK_TO_DRV
20
#LIQ5
#LIQ6
DATA_TO_DRV
21
#LYSE_SENSOR
#WASTE_SENSOR
DATA_FROM_DRV
22
#LS_ON
DGND
DGND
5-12
Hardware System
23
DGND
DGND
DGND
24
OP17_CTRL
OP17_STS
UART0_TO_DRV
25
OP18_CTRL
OP18_STS
UART0_TO_DAT
26
OP19_CTRL
OP19_STS
DGND
27
OP20_CTRL
OP20_STS
DGND
28
OP1_CTRL
OP1_STS
OP2_CTRL
29
OP2_STS
OP3_CTRL
OP3_STS
30
OP4_CTRL
OP4_STS
OP5_CTRL
31
OP5_STS
OP6_CTRL
OP6_STS
32
OP7_CTRL
OP7_STS
OP8_CTRL

column A
column B
column C
OP8_STS
OP9_CTRL
OP9_STS
OP10_CTRL
OP10_STS
OP11_CTRL
OP11_STS
OP12_CTRL
OP12_STS
OP13_CTRL
OP13_STS
OP14_CTRL
OP14_STS
OP15_CTRL
OP15_STS
OP16_CTRL
OP16_STS
DM_ON
DGND
DGND
DGND
NC
NC
NC
P+24V
SM1_AP
SM1_AP
10
P+24V
SM1_AN
SM1_AN
11
P+24V
SM1_BP
SM1_BP
12
P+24V
SM1_BN
SM1_BN
13
P+24V
SM2_AP
SM2_AP
14
P+24V
SM2_AN
SM2_AN
15
P+24V
SM2_BP
SM2_BP
16
P+24V
SM2_BN
SM2_BN
17
P+24V
SM3_AP
SM3_AP
18
P+24V
SM3_AN
SM3_AN
19
P+24V
SM3_BP
SM3_BP
20
P+24V
SM3_BN
SM3_BN
21
P+24V
SM4_AP
SM4_AP
22
P+24V
SM4_AN
SM4_AN
23
P+24V
SM4_BP
SM4_BP
24
P+24V
SM4_BN
SM4_BN
25
PGND
SM5_AP
SM5_AP
5-13
Hardware System
26
PGND
SM5_AN
SM5_AN
27
PGND
SM5_BP
SM5_BP
28
PGND
SM5_BN
SM5_BN
29
PGND
SM6_AP
SM6_AP
30
PGND
SM6_AN
SM6_AN
31
PGND
SM6_BP
SM6_BP
32
PGND
SM6_BN
SM6_BN

column A
column B
column C
PGND
SM7_AP
SM7_AP
PGND
SM7_AN
SM7_AN
PGND
SM7_BP
SM7_BP
PGND
SM7_BN
SM7_BN
PGND
SM8_AP
SM8_AP
PGND
SM8_AN
SM8_AN
PGND
SM8_BP
SM8_BP
PGND
SM8_BN
SM8_BN
PGND
HT1_ON
HT1_ON
10
PGND
HT2_ON
HT2_ON
11
PGND
PGND
PGND
12
PGND
PUMP7
PUMP7
13
PGND
PUMP6
PUMP6
14
P+12V
PUMP5
PUMP5
15
P+12V
PUMP4
PUMP4
16
P+12V
PUMP3
PUMP3
17
P+12V
PUMP2
PUMP2
18
P+12V
PUMP1
PUMP1
19
V1
V2
V3
20
V4
V5
V6
21
V7
V8
V9
22
V10
V11
V12
23
V13
V14
V15
24
V16
V17
V18
25
V19
V20
V21
26
V22
V23
V24
27
V25
V26
V27
28
V28
V29
V30
5-14
Hardware System
29
V31
V32
V33
30
V34
V35
V36
31
V37
V38
V39
32
V40
NC
NC
Connector J14 for temperature sensor

Pin
Definition
Description
HT1_SA
both ends of thermistor of heater
HT1_SB
HT2_SA
both ends of thermistor of heater
HT2_SB
AMBI_SA
both
AMBI_SB
environment temperature
ends
of
thermistor
of
Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*12 TOP PHSERIES

Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST'
Pin
Definition
Description
P+12V
PGND
DGND
POSI_PRESS
Pressure chamber (pressure) signal
NEGA_PRESS
Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal
DGND
#VM_ON
Volumetric optics is on, effective low
#RBC_START
RBC volume measurement starts, effective low
#RBC_STOP
RBC volume measurement stops, effective low
10
#WBC_START
WBC volume measurement starts, effective low
11
#WBC_STOP
WBC volume measurement stops, effective low
12
D+5V
Connector J16 for liquid level sensor
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP

Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST'
5-15
Hardware System
Pin
Definition
Description
D+5V
#LIQ1
LIQ1status, effective low
#LIQ2
LIQ 2 status, effective low
#LIQ3
#LIQ4
#LIQ5
#LS_ON
Control signal for liquid level board
GND
NC
10
NC
11
#LIQ6
12
GND
13
#LYSE_SENSOR
14
GND
15
#WASTE_SENSOR
16
GND
17
NC
18
NC
19
OP17_CTRL
Optics 17 control
20
OP17_STS
Optics 17 status
21
GND
22
GND
23
OP18_CTRL
Optics 18 control
24
OP18_STS
Optics 18 status
25
GND
26
GND
27
OP19_CTRL
Optics 19 control
28
OP19_STS
Optics 19 status
29
GND
30
GND
31
OP20_CTRL
Optics 20 control
32
OP20_STS
Optics 20 status
33
GND
34
GND

LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective low
Waste level sensor status, effective low
Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor
Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors.
5-16
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP
Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST'
Pin
Definition
Description
OP1_CTRL
Optics 1 drive
OP1_STS
Optics 1 status
3,4
DGND
OP2_CTRL
Optics 2 drive
OP2_STS
Optics 2 status
7,8
DGND
OP3_CTRL
Optics 3 drive
10
OP3_STS
Optics 3 status
11,12
DGND
13
OP4_CTRL
Optics 4 control
14
OP4_STS
Optics 4 status
15,16
DGND
17
OP5_CTRL
Optics 5 drive
18
OP5_STS
Optics 5 status
19,20
DGND
21
OP6_CTRL
Optics 6 drive
22
OP6_STS
Optics 6 status
23,24
DGND

Pin
Definition
Description
OP7_CTRL
Optics 7 drive
OP7_STS
Optics 7 status
3,4
DGND
OP8_CTRL
Optics 8 drive
OP8_STS
Optics 8 status
7,8
DGND
OP9_CTRL
Optics 9 drive
10
OP9_STS
Optics 9 status
11,12
DGND
13
OP10_CTRL
Optics 10 drive
14
OP10_STS
Optics 10 status
15,16
DGND
17
OP11_CTRL
Optics 11 drive
5-17
Hardware System
18
OP11_STS
Optics 11 status
19,20
DGND
21
OP12_CTRL
Optics 12 drive
22
OP12_STS
Optics 12 status
23,24
DGND

Pin
Definition
Description
OP13_CTRL
Optics 13 drive
OP13_STS
Optics 13 status
3,4
DGND
OP14_CTRL
Optics 14 drive
OP14_STS
Optics 14 status
7,8
DGND
OP15_CTRL
Optics 15 drive
10
OP15_STS
Optics 15 status
11,12
DGND
13
OP16_CTRL
Optics 16
14
OP16_STS
Optics 16 status
15,16
DGND
17-24
NC
Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*3
TOP PHSERIES

Pin
Definition
DM_ON
NC
DGND
Description
DC Motor drive
Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors
Each connector connects two motors.

Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM
5-18
Hardware System
Pin
Definition
Description
SM1_AP
A-phase coil drive , motor 1
SM1_AN
SM1-BP
B-phase coil drive , motor 1
SM1_BN
SM2_AP
SM2_AN
SM2-BP
SM2_BN

Pin
Definition
Description
SM3_AP
SM3_AN
SM3-BP
SM3_BN
SM4_AP
SM4_AN
SM4-BP
SM4_BN

Pin
Definition
Description
SM5_AP
SM5_AN
SM5-BP
SM5-BN
SM6_AP
SM6_AN
SM6-BP
SM6_BN
5-19
Hardware System
Pin
Definition
Description
SM7_AP
SM7_AN
SM7-BP
SM7_BN
SM8_AP
SM8_AN
SM8-BP
SM8_BN
Connector J27, J28 for heaters

Pin
Definition
P+24V
HT1_ON
3,4
Description
Heater 1 drive
Heater 1 control

Pin
Definition
P+24V
HT2_ON
3,4
Description
Heater 2 drive
Heater 2 control
Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves
Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors.

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES
Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
Pin
Definition
1~6
NC
PUMP7
P+12V
PUMP6
10
P+12V
Description
Pump 7 drive
Pump 6 drive
5-20
Hardware System
11
PUMP5
12
P+12V
13
PUMP4
14
P+12V
15
PUMP3
16
P+12V
17
PUMP2
18
P+12V
19
PUMP1
20
P+12V
Pump 5 drive
Pump 4 drive
Pump 3 drive
Pump 2 drive
Pump 1 drive

Pin
Definition
V1
P+12V
V2
P+12V
V3
P+12V
V4
P+12V
V5
10
P+12V
11
V6
12
P+12V
13
V7
14
P+12V
15
V8
16
P+12V
17
V9
18
P+12V
19
V10
20
P+12V
Description
Valve 1 drive
Valve 2 drive
Valve 3 drive
Valve 4 drive
Valve 5 drive
Valve 6 drive
Valve 7 drive
Valve 8 drive
Valve 9 drive
Valve 10 drive

Pin
Definition
V11
P+12V
Description
Valve 11 drive
5-21
Hardware System
3
V12
P+12V
V13
P+12V
V14
P+12V
V15
10
P+12V
11
V16
12
P+12V
13
V17
14
P+12V
15
V18
16
P+12V
17
V19
18
P+12V
19
V20
20
P+12V
Valve 12 drive
Valve 13 drive
Valve 14 drive
Valve 15 drive
Valve 16 drive
Valve 17 drive
Valve 18 drive
Valve 19 drive
Valve 20 drive

Pin
Definition
V21
P+12V
V22
P+12V
V23
P+12V
V24
P+12V
V25
10
P+12V
11
V26
12
P+12V
13
V27
14
P+12V
15
V28
16
P+12V
17
V29
Description
Valve 21 drive
Valve 22 drive
Valve 23 drive
Valve 24 drive
Valve 25 drive
Valve 26 drive
Valve 27 drive
Valve 28 drive
Valve 29 drive
5-22
Hardware System
18
P+12V
19
V30
20
P+12V
Valve 30 drive

Pin
Definition
V31
P+12V
V32
P+12V
V33
P+12V
V34
P+12V
V35
10
P+12V
11
V36
12
P+12V
13
V37
14
P+12V
15
V38
16
P+12V
17
V39
18
P+12V
19
V40
20
P+12V
Description
Valve 31 drive
Valve 32 drive
Valve 33 drive
Valve 34 drive
Valve 35 drive
Valve 36 drive
Valve 37 drive
Valve 38 drive
Valve 39 drive
Valve 40 drive
Connector J37 for D+5V

Model: 3928-1043
Pin
Definition
D+5V
D+5V
DGND
DGND
Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V

5-23
Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES
Model: 39-31-0108
Pin
Definition
P+24V
P+24V
P+24V
P+12V
P+12V
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
10
PGND
Connector J34 for fan power

Pin
Definition
P+12V
PGND
Connector J36 for power (autoloader board)

Model: 3928-1063
Pin
Definition
D+5V
P+12V
P+24V
DGND
PGND
PGND
5-24
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board
5-25
Hardware System
5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points

There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal,
use the touch points of connectors directly.
On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the
configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following
introduction for connection method.
By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via
PC COM port).
1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function
2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data boards function of controlling the drive board
3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function
4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data boards function of controlling the autoloader
board
5. Autoloader board COM: debugging the function of autoloader board
Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and
the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board,
and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board.
JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can
also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the
data board or the autoloader board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 5-3)
See Table 5-42 for configuration details.
Table 5-42 Configuration details
Debugging COM port
Data board UART0
JP1
JP2
Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and
No jumpers
3-4,
Drive board COM
Put jumpers on
pins 5-6
No jumpers
and 7-8
Data board UART1
Put jumpers on pins 9-10
Put
and 11-12.
1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..
Put
COM
and 11-12.
9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.
Data board UART3
No jumpers.
Autoloader
board
jumpers
jumpers
on
on
pins
pins
and 15-16.
A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as
shown in the following table.
5-26
Hardware System
Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection
Connector
cable
Serial
DB9
male
cable
JP3
with
female
3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16
connectors on both ends,
receptacle
signals not intercrossed
(straight or 90
Serial
installation)
connectors on both ends,
cable
with
female
3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12
signals intercrossed; namely

the COM cable
Serial cable with a female
DB9
female
1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16
connector on one end and a
receptacle
male connector on the other
(straight or 90
end, signals not intercross;
installation)
namely the COM extension

cable
Serial cable with a female
1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12
connector on one end and a

male connector on the other
end, signals intercross
JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive
board or the autoloader board is to be connected to J3.
Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port
JTAG function
Connect MCU JTAG of
JP4
No jumpers
autoloader board
Connect MCU JTAG of
Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and
drive board
7-8.
Note: the mother board does not provide a fixed connection to the JTAG port of the autoloader
MCU. If you need to update the autoloader MCU on the analyzer, connect the J11 and J3
receptacles using the cable dedicated for autoloader update before updating on PC using the
client update software. The dedicated cable is provided to the service and manufacture
personnel, not as an accessory of the analyzer.
5-27
Hardware System
5.1.4 Removal
Purpose
The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, follow the
steps below.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:
To remove the mother board from the analyzer:
1. Power off the analyzer.

2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer
4. Remove the data board and the drive board.
5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws
fixing the bracket.
7. Pull the bracket to remove it.
5-28
Hardware System
Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1

1 Bracket
2 Mother board
3 M4X8 panhead screw
To disassemble the mother board:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws on the mother board.
2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port
connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.
Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2

1 Bracket
2 Mother board
3M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws

5-29
Hardware System
Installation
Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on
the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain
error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet
the whole unit cannot function properly
Verification
1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all
measurements should be within normal ranges.
2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning
correctly.
5.1.5 Troubleshooting
Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a
failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.
Table 5-45 Troubleshooting
Failure
Abnormal
Cause
voltage
detected
cable
connected
not
Recommended Action
properly
to
power
connector
Check connectors J12, J13, J35,

J37;
If the connection is normal, use a
multimeter to check if the voltage
of each power source indicated
on the mother board is correct.
Fan not running.
Fan damaged or no power
Check connector J34;
supply
Check the P12V indicator on the

drive board
Communication failure
Connector J4 abnormal..
Check connector J4
of autoloader board
Connector J36 abnormal..
Check connector J36
Pressure
Connector J15 abnormal
Check connector J15
Volumetric abnormal
Check connector J15
Liquid level inspection
Check connector J16
control
abnormal
5-30
Hardware System
abnormal, misinform
Laser not light or laser
Check connector J7
Pre-amp board has no
Connectors J9 and J10
Check connectors J9 and J10
power
abnormal
current
detected
abnormal
or
work
abnormally.
Motor not active
Motor
drive
cable
not
properly connected .
Valve not active
Valve
drive
cable
and 25
not
properly connected.
Pump not active
Pump
drive
cable
Check connectors J22,J23,J24,

Check connectors J30,J31,J32
and J33
not
Check connector J29
not
Check connector J14
properly connected
Temperature
fails.
control
Temperature
sensor
properly connected.
5-31
Hardware System
5.2 Data board

5.2.1 Introduction
The data function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The
analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and
converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and
uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the
access interface.
5.2.2 Board composition

Function
The analog part:
Conditioning and converting power
Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage
and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status,
etc.)
Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
Driving constant-current supply
Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels
Zapping apertures
AD conversion
The digital part:
Providing a platform for software operating
Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board
Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board
Providing communication interfaces for PC
Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board
Processing digital signals and identifying pulse
Block diagram
5-32
Hardware System
Figure 5-6 Data board circuit

A12VAC120V
Power for analog
circuits
Analog power filter module
signal monitoring of laser current driver

Laser driver
Gain control
RBC/PLT
sensor
RBC/PLT amplification
RBCPLT
RBC/PLT aperture
Constant current source
/zapping control
Constant current source/zapping

control module of RBC/PLT hole
Monitoring
module
Gain control
WBC sensor
WBC
WBC aperture
WBC amplification
Constant current source

/burn control
Constant current source/zapping

control module of WBC hole
HGB
Digital
circuits
of data
board
Gain control
HGB sensor
HGB amplification
HGB
Driver control
HGB led constant current driver
A/D module
Gain control
SS preamplification board
SS amplification
FS preamplification board
FS amplification
FS
Gain control
SS preamplification board
SF amplification
Gain control
SS
FS base currrent
SF
Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board
5-33
Hardware System
Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board
Description
The analog part:
Conditioning and converting voltages
The A12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or
converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping
apertures.
Monitoring voltage
The voltage of A12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS
blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.
Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals
WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Detecting and amplifying HGB signals
The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then
after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.
Conditioning WBC DIFF signals
The WBC DIFF signals including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved are first
collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.
Driving constant-current supply
The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the
RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.
Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels

5-34
Hardware System
The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are
controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC,
RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.
Zapping aperture
If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the
zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperture by high temperature.
AD conversion
The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and
HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing.
The digital part:
Providing a platform for operating system and application software
CPU MCF5474, 266MHz

DDR128M, 133MHz
FLASH16Mx16bit
Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board
Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board
Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even
The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading
By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the
autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.
Interface for the indicator board
The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.
Interface for the volumetric board
Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals
Interface for the laser control board
Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current
Key input interface
Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad).
5-35
Hardware System
Status detection interface
Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box
Analog signal input interface
Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes
10M100M network interface
The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross
network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.
BDM debug interface
The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and
writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.
JTAG interface of FPGA
It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.
The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture
electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to
connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved
connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board.
See the following table for the function of each connector.
Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board
Connector
J1
J2
J3
J7
Number of
Function
Connects
the
RBC/PLT
Note
pins
aperture
electrode
Connects the WBC aperture electrode
Connects the digital part to the mother
board
Connects the analog part to the
mother board
3
3
96
96
/
/
/
/
J8
JTAG interface of FPGA
10
J9
Reserved
20
J10
Reserved
40
J11
Reserved
14
J13
BDM interface of CPU
26
The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:
5-36
Hardware System
Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board
Definition of J1
J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT.

Table 5-47 Definition of J1
Pin
Name
Note
SHELL
Shielding ground
RHOLE_A
RBC/PLT signals
RHOLE_B
RBC analog ground
Definition of J2
J2 is the signal interface of WBC.

Pin
Name
Note
WHOLE _B
WBC analog ground
WHOLE_A
WBC signals
SHELL
Shielding ground
Definition of J3
J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin connector.
5-37
Hardware System
Pin
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Definition
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
Function
Pin
Definition
Function
Power supply
B17
JTAG_TCK_
JTAG clock of autoloader
AS
board
JTAG_TO_A
JTAG
autoloader board
JTAG_FROM
JTAG
_AS
autoloader board
UART1_TO_
Reserved
DAT+
port sending
UART1_TO_
Reserved
DAT-
port sending
Power supply
B18
Power supply
B19
Power supply
B20
Power supply
B21
sending
of
receiving
debug
debug
of
serial
serial
A6
DGND
Signal ground
B22
DGND
Signal ground
A7
DGND
Signal ground
B23
DGND
Signal ground
A8
DGND
Signal ground
B24
DGND
Signal ground
A9
DGND
Signal ground
B25
#VMCTRL
Volumetric board enabling
A10
DGND
Signal ground
B26
#RBC_STAR
Start
metering
#RBC_STOP
Stop
A11
DGND
Signal ground
B27
RBC
volume
RBC
volume
WBC
volume
WBC
volume
metering
A12
TP_TX+
Positive sending
terminal
B28
of
#WBC_STAR
Start
metering
#RBC_STOP
Stop
network
A13
TP_TX-
Negative sending
terminal
B29
of
metering
network
A14
DGND
Signal ground
B30
DGND
Signal ground
A15
DGND
Signal ground
B31
#LASER_CT
Laser board enabling
RL
A16
JTAG_TMS
JTAG
mode
B32
DGND
Signal ground
signal
A17
JTAG_TCK
JTAG clock signal
C1
D+5V
Power supply
A18
JTAG_TO_
JTAG sending of
C2
D+5V
Power supply
DRV
drive board
JTAG_TO_
JTAG receiving of
C3
D+5V
Power supply
DAT
drive board
A20
DGND
Signal ground
C4
D+5V
Power supply
A21
DGND
Signal ground
C5
D+5V
Power supply
A22
UART0_TO
Serial
C6
DGND
Signal ground
A19
port
5-38
Hardware System
_DRV
sending of drive
board
A23
UART0_TO
Serial
port
_DAT
receiving of drive
C7
DGND
Signal ground
board
A24
DGND
Signal ground
C8
DGND
Signal ground
A25
DGND
Signal ground
C9
DGND
Signal ground
A26
DGND
Signal ground
C10
DGND
Signal ground
A27
DGND
Signal ground
C11
DGND
Signal ground
A28
DGND
Signal ground
C12
TP_RX+
Positive
receiving
terminal of network
A29
DGND
Signal ground
C13
TP_RX-
Negative
receiving
terminal of network
A30
DGND
Signal ground
C14
DGND
Signal ground
A31
DGND
Signal ground
C15
DGND
Signal ground
A32
DGND
Signal ground
C16
UART3_TO_
PC communication serial
PC
port sending
UART3_TO_
PC communication serial
DAT
port receiving
B1
D+5V
Power supply
C17
B2
D+5V
Power supply
C18
DGND
Signal ground
B3
D+5V
Power supply
C19
DGND
Signal ground
B4
D+5V
Power supply
C20
UART1_TO_
autoloader board serial
AS+
port sending
UART1_TO_
autoloader board serial
AS-
port receiving
B5
D+5V
Power supply
C21
B6
DGND
Signal ground
C22
DGND
Signal ground
B7
DGND
Signal ground
C23
DGND
Signal ground
B8
DGND
Signal ground
C24
Aspiration
SUCK_KEY
input
key
control
B9
DGND
Signal ground
C25
DGND
Signal ground
B10
DGND
Signal ground
C26
BUZ
Buzzer control output
B11
DGND
Signal ground
C27
#COUNT_KE
Aspirate key control input
Y
B12
PWFBOUT
Network
power
C28
FAULT_J
supply feedback
B13
DGND
Signal ground
Indicator control output

(red)
C29
READY_J
Indicator control output

(green)
B14
DGND
Signal ground
C30
OPTI_DOOR
Laser
shielding
monitoring input
5-39
box
Hardware System
B15
B16
DGND
Signal ground
mode
C31
JTAG_TMS
JTAG
of
_AS
autoloader board
C32
#RIGHT_DO
Right
door
status
OR
monitoring input
#INSERT_KE
Compartment door open
key control input
Definition of J7
J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin plug.
Pin
Name
Note
Pin
Name
Note
A1
AGND
Analog ground
B17
HGB_IN
HGB signals input
A2
AGND
Analog ground
B18
AGND
Analog ground
A3
AGND
Analog ground
B19
HGB+
HGB
light
drive
positive
drive
negative
electrode
A4
AGND
Analog ground
B20
HGB-
HGB
light
electrode
A5
AGND
Analog ground
B21
A-12V
-12V power supply
A6
AGND
Analog ground
B22
A-12V
-12V power supply
A7
AGND
Analog ground
B23
A+12V
+12V power supply
A8
AGND
Analog ground
B24
A+12V
+12V power supply
A9
AGND
Analog ground
B25
A+12V
+12V power supply
A10
AGND
Analog ground
B26
NC
A11
AGND
Analog ground
B27
NC
A12
AGND
Analog ground
B28
NC
A13
AGND
Analog ground
B29
NC
A14
AGND
Analog ground
B30
AC120V_
Zapping voltage input
B
A15
AGND
Analog ground
B31
NC
A16
AGND
Analog ground
B32
NC
A17
AGND
Analog ground
C1
AGND
Analog ground
A18
AGND
Analog ground
C2
AGND
Analog ground
A19
AGND
Analog ground
C3
AGND
Analog ground
A20
AGND
Analog ground
C4
AGND
Analog ground
A21
AGND
Analog ground
C5
AGND
Analog ground
A22
AGND
Analog ground
C6
AGND
Analog ground
A23
AGND
Analog ground
C7
AGND
Analog ground
A24
AGND
Analog ground
C8
AGND
Analog ground
A25
AGND
Analog ground
C9
AGND
Analog ground
5-40
Hardware System
A26
NC
C10
AGND
Analog ground
A27
NC
C11
AGND
Analog ground
A28
NC
C12
AGND
Analog ground
A29
NC
C13
AGND
Analog ground
A30
NC
C14
AGND
Analog ground
A31
NC
C15
AGND
Analog ground
A32
AC120V_
Zapping voltage input
C16
AGND
Analog ground
C17
AGND
Analog ground
C18
AGND
Analog ground
A
B1
AGND
Analog ground
B2
LASER_I
Laser
monitoring input
B3
AGND
Analog ground
C19
AGND
Analog ground
B4
AGND
Analog ground
C20
AGND
Analog ground
B5
AGND
Analog ground
C21
A-12V
-12V power supply
B6
AGND
Analog ground
C22
A-12V
-12V power supply
B7
AGND
Analog ground
C23
A+12V
+12V power supply
B8
AGND
Analog ground
C24
A+12V
+12V power supply
B9
AGND
Analog ground
C25
A+12V
+12V power supply
B10
AGND
Analog ground
C26
NC
B11
FS_IN
FS signals input
C27
NC
B12
AGND
Analog ground
C28
NC
B13
SS_IN
SS signals input
C29
NC
B14
AGND
Analog ground
C30
NC
B15
SF_IN
SF signals input
C31
NC
B16
AGND
Analog ground
C32
NC
current
Definition of J8
J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA.

Pin
Name
Note
FPGA_TCK
Clock
GND
Signal ground
FPGA_TDO
Data output
VDD
Power supply
FPGA_TMS
Testing mode selection
VDD
Power supply
NC
NC
5-41
Hardware System
FPGA_TDI
Data input
10
GND
Signal ground
Definition of J9
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J10
Reserved. Not available for customers..
Definition of J11
Reserved. Not available for customers.
Definition of J13
J11 is the BDM interface of CPU.

Pin
Definition
Function
NC
BKPT#
Breakpoint setup
GND
Signal ground
DSCLK
synchronizing clock input
GND
Signal ground
TCK
Clock input of JATG
BDM_RSTI
BDM reset
DSI
Serial input
VDD
Power supply
10
DSO
Serial output
11
GND
Signal ground
12
PSTDATA7
13
PSTDATA6
14
PSTDATA5
15
PSTDATA4
16
PSTDATA3
17
PSTDATA2
18
PSTDATA1
19
PSTDATA0
20
GND
Signal ground
21
NC
22
NC
23
GND
Signal ground
Configuration data
5-42
Hardware System
24
PSTCLK
Processor clock
25
NC
26
MCF_TA#
Transmission response
Assembly drawing
5-43
Hardware System
Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board
5-44
Hardware System

All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust
the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.
LED function definition
Table 5-53 LED function definition

No.
Indicator
Function description
D17
A-12V power indicator
D20
A+12V power indicator
D21
A-5V power indicator
D22
A+5V power indicator
D39
Reserved for software use.
D40
D41
D42
D43
10
D44
Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network

conflicts.
11
D45
100M network communication indicator. It turns on

when enabled.
12
D46
10M network communication indicator. It turns on

when enabled.
13
D47
Network connection indicator. It turns on when

enabled.
14
D48
Network full-duplex communication indicator. It

turns on when enabled.
15
D49
FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on

when the configuration is done.
16
D51
D+5V power indicator
Function definition of test points
5-45
Hardware System
Table 5-54 Test points on data board
No.
Test point
Signal
Function description
under test
+12V
AVCC
+12V power supply of analog part
-12V
AVSS
-12V power supply of analog part
+5V
AVDD
+5V power supply of analog part
-5V
AVEE
-5V power supply of analog part
VR_MON
+2.5V
+2.5V power supply of analog part
VR_H
+2.5V
+2.5V power supply of analog part
+56V
VCONST
+12VM
-12VM
10
+56VM
VCONSTM
11
RHOLE
RHOLE
RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
12
WHOLE
WHOLE
WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring
13
FSBASE
FSBASE
FS background voltage monitoring
14
LASER
LASER
Laser diode drive current monitoring
15
HGB1
HGB1
HGB channel voltage value after I/V
16
NHGB
#HGBLED
HGB light on-off control
17
HGB
HGB
HGB measurement voltage value
18
NBURN
#BURN
Zapping control
19
PULSE
PULSE
20
FS_IN
FS_IN
FS pre-amplification board output signals
21
FS1
FS1
Adjustable amplified FS signals
22
FS
FS
Analog signals outputted by FS channel
23
SS_IN
SS_IN
SS pre-amplification board output signals
24
SS1
SS1
Adjustable amplified SS signals
25
SS
SS
Analog signals outputted by SS channel
26
SF_IN
SF_IN
SF pre-amplification board output signals
27
SF1
SF1
Adjustable amplified SF signals
28
SF
SF
Analog signals outputted by SF channel
29
NCONST
#CONST
Constant current source control
30
NSEL_R
#SELECT_
RBC aperture zapping/constant current
Drive voltage of constant current source

of electrode
A+12V_MO
+12V power supply monitoring
N
A-12V_MO
-12V power supply monitoring
N
Monitor drive voltage of constant current
source of electrode
Pulse
control
signals
that
produce
zapping voltage
5-46
Hardware System
RBC
selection control
#SELECT_
WBC aperture zapping/constant current
WBC
selection control
31
NSEL_W
32
RBC1
RBC1
33
RBC2
RBC2
34
RBC3
RBC3
35
RBC
RBC
36
PLT1
PLT1
37
PLT2
PLT2
38
PLT
PLT
39
WBC1
WBC1
40
WBC2
WBC2
41
WBC3
WBC3
42
WBC
WBC
WBC channel signals of output grade
43
HCLK
HCLK
HGB and clock of monitoring voltage
44
HGND
HGND
Analog ground
45
RBCF
RBCF
Signals inputted into AD from RBC
46
VR_R
VR_R
AD reference voltage of RBC
47
RAGND
RAGND
Analog ground
48
RCLK
RCLK
AD clock signals of RBC
49
WBCF
WBCF
Signals inputted into AD from WBC
50
VR_W
VR_W
AD reference voltage of WBC
51
WAGND
WAGND
Analog ground
52
WCLK
WCLK
AD clock signals of WBC
53
PLTF
PLTF
Signals inputted into AD from PLT
54
VR_P
VR_P
AD reference voltage of PLT
55
PAGND
PAGND
Analog ground
56
PCLK
PCLK
AD clock signals of PLT
57
MCLK
MCLK
AD clock of monitoring voltage
58
FSF
FSF
AD input from FS
59
FSCLK
FSCLK
AD clock signals of FS
RBC channel output signals of adjustable

amplification grade
RBC channel output signals of direct
current restoring grade
RBC channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade
RBC channel signals of output grade
PLT channel output signals of direct
PLT channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade
PLT channel signals of output grade
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
amplification grade
WBC channel output signals of direct
WBC channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade
5-47
Hardware System
60
SSF
SSF
AD input from SS
61
SSCLK
SSCLK
AD clock signals of SS
62
SFF
SFF
AD input from SF
63
SFCLK
SFCLK
AD clock signals of SF
64
TP8
MCF_FBAD
Flexbus address data 1 of CPU
65
TP9
66
TP37
67
TP45
VCC
+5V digital power supply
68
TP46
VDD
+3.3V digital power supply
69
TP47
D_1V5
70
TP48
D_1V8
71
TP57
D_1V2_FG
72
TP71
D_2V5
73
TP74
#MCF_CS1
Flexbus CS1 of CPU
74
TP75
MCF_R/#W
Flexbus read/write signals of CPU
75
TP76
MCF_FBAD
76
TP78
D_1V25VTT
VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
77
TP79
#MCF_CS0
Flexbus CS0 of CPU
78
TP80
FPGA_DDR
+2.5V DDR power on FPGA
79
TP81
80
TP82
81
TP83
82
TP85
83
TP86
84
TP87
85
TP95
86
TP96
1
MCF_FBAD
2
FPGA_DDR
VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
_VRF
PA
_2V5
FPGA_DDR
VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V
_VTT
MCF_FBAD
5
D_1V25VR
VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V
F
MCF_FBAD
5
#MCF_OE
Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU
MCF_TS
Address latch indication of Flexbus of

CPU
MCF_FBAD
3
#MCF_RST
Reset input signals of CPU
5-48
Hardware System
I
87
TP101
88
TP102
89
TP103
90
TP104
91
TP105
92
TP106
#MCF_IRQ
Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU
1
#MCF_IRQ
2
#MCF_IRQ
3
#MCF_IRQ
5
#MCF_IRQ
6
#MCF_IRQ
AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are
connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope
probe grounded end.
Data board key definition

Table 5-55 Key definition
No.
S12
Function
Manually reset the main CPU
5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method
Purpose
Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..
Tools
Disassembly
Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
5-49
Hardware System
Remove the data board from the main unit:
1. Shut down the analyzer.

2. Remove the left door.
3. Remove the top cover board
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from
the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover.
5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board.
6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and
then draw the data board out.
Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1
1---Upper cover of the shielding box of
2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
data board
(with washer)
3---Data board
4---Hand-tightened screws
Further disassembly of the data board
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the data board.
5-50
Hardware System
2. Remove the data board from the bracket.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6
socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.
Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2

1---Cross-recessed
panhead
screw
2---Data board
M3x6 (with washer)

3---Bracket
4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data

board
5---Panhead screw M4X8
6---Socket cap screws M3X12
Assembly
Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on.
2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization.
3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.
The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board
are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the
corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range
indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out
5-51
Hardware System
the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly.
Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part
No.
1
Error
12V
power
supply error
Character
Possible Cause
The voltage of the
Improper
+12V
connection
test
point
cable
with
exceeds the range
the mother board
of 120.6V; or the
or
ripple
caused
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Recommended action
Reconnect
the
cable
or
change a new cable
disconnection
by
broken cable
Improper
12V
Check whether the proper
power supply sent
power supply is sent by the
by
mother board or the power
the
board
mother
or
the
board
power board
Inductor
L16
capacitor
or
C111,
Re-solder
or
change
the
component
C95 and C88 are

damaged or not
properly soldered.
2
-12V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
Improper
-12V
connection
test
point
cable
with
exceeds the range
the mother board
of -120.6V; or the
or
ripple
caused
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Reconnect
the
cable
or
change a new cable
disconnection
by
broken cable
Improper
-12V
power supply sent
power supply is sent by the
by
mother board or the power
the
board
mother
or
the
board
power board
Inductor
capacitor
L18
or
C112,
C94 and C87 are

damaged or not
properly soldered
5-52
Re-solder
component
or
change
the
Hardware System
3
+5V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
The +5V relating
First ensure the +12V power
+5V
circuit
rosin
supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range
jointed; the power
check the +5V relating circuit,
of +50.25 V
supplys
re-solder
impedance to the
component.
test
point
is
ground
is
decreased;
or
or
change
the
power chip U14 is

damaged
4
-5V
power
supply error
The voltage of the
The -5V relating
First ensure the -12V power
-5V
circuit
rosin
supply works normally. Then,
exceeds the range
jointed; the power
check the -5V relating circuit,
of -50.25 V
supplys
re-solder
impedance to the
component.
test
point
is
ground
is
decreased;
or
or
change
the
power chip U12 is

damaged
5
+2.5V reference
The voltage of the
If the +5V (AVDD)
Check the relating circuit;
power
VR_MON or VR_H
power
supply
re-solder
test point exceeds
works
normally,
the
then the problem
supply
error
range
of
2.50.125 V
or
change
the
component
occurred probably
because
power
chip U45 or U43,

and its peripheral
components
are
damaged or not
properly soldered.
6
+56
current
power
error
constant
The voltage of the
The boost circuit
Check the chip U72, U70,
drive
VCONST test point
works improperly
U71 and their peripherals for
supply
exceeds the range

of 563V
any rosin joint or damage

The
56V
voltage-regulator
diode is damaged
or
not
soldered.
5-53
properly
Re-solder
component
or
change
the
Hardware System
7
+56V monitoring
The voltage of the
If the +56V power
Check the U39 and relating
voltage error
+56VM test point
supply
components;
exceeds the range
normally, then the
of 1.370.2V
problem occurred
works
re-solder
or
change the component
probably because
something
wrong
is
with
the
monitoring circuit..
8
+12V monitoring
The voltage of the
The relating circuit
If the +12V power supply
voltage error
+12VM test point
is
properly
works normally, check U40
exceeds the range
soldered;
the
and the relating components,
of 1.8V-2.2V
power
not
supplys
impendence to the
ground
re-solder
or
change
the
component.
is
decreased;
Something
wrong
is
with
the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
9
-12V monitoring
The voltage of the
The relating circuit
Check U40 and the relating
voltage error
-12VM
is
components,
test
point
not
properly
exceeds the range
soldered;
of 2.2V-2.6V
power
re-solder
or
the
change the component under
supplys
the circumstance that the
impendence to the
-12V power supply works
ground
normally
is
decreased;
Something
wrong
is
with
the
power IC or the
corresponding AD.
10
RBC
aperture
The value of the
Constant
current
Check whether the constant
voltage
aperture
source
control
current source control signals
monitoring error
exceeds the range
signals abnormal,
are
of 10V-14V
56V
foregoing troubleshooting to
voltage-regulator
remove the error of 56V
diode abnormal or
circuit.
voltage
normal.
See
the
boost circuit error

Bath not properly
Check
wired; clogging.
perform
the
procedure
5-54
the
bath
wiring;
unclogging
Hardware System
Monitoring
circuit
error
Components
the
of
monitoring
circuit
are
Check whether the relating

circuit or AD works normally.
not
properly soldered,
or
the
corresponding AD
works abnormally.
11
WBC
aperture
Same as point 10
Same as point 10
Same as point 10
HGB
HGB value of the
HGB light error or
Check whether HGB light is
background
test point exceeds
the gain
on, or adjust the gain multiple
voltage
the normal range
abnormal
(4.2V-4.8V)
voltage
monitoring error
12
of HGB channel
The
Check
corresponding AD
corresponding
works abnormally,
normally.
or
the
error
message
is
whether
AD
the
works
accidentally
triggered
by
improper wiring.
13
FS background
The value of the
The flow cell is
Clean the flow cell in time, or
voltage
FSBASE test point
dirty, or something
check whether the U38 and
monitoring error
exceeds the normal
is wrong with the
the corresponding AD chip
range (0-400mv)
corresponding
U44 work normally.
monitoring circuit
error.
14
Laser
drive
diode
The value of the
Something
current
LASER test point
wrong
exceeds the range
current value sent
laser
of 1.0-3.0V.
by
whether the monitoring value
monitoring error
with
the
control board
is
Check whether the cable is
the
properly connected to the
laser
control
and
sent from the laser control

board is normal
5-55
board
Hardware System
Data
board
Check whether the operation
monitoring circuit
amplifier
error,
corresponding AD chip U44
the
corresponding AD
error
U38
and
the
work normally.
or
connection
cable
abnormal
15
RBC
aperture
zapping error
No sound is heard
Something
and no bubbles are
wrong
produced
when
zapping the bath
is
Ensuring the wiring of the
the
bath is correct, then check
zapping
voltage
whether the AC120V zapping
supplied
by
the
power of the power board is
power board, or
proper, or check whether the
with the part of the
zapping control signals are
data
effective.
with
board
that
controls zapping.
16
WBC
aperture
Same as point 15
Same as point 15
Same as point 15
No
No WBC/RBC/PLT
Bath wiring error,
Use a oscilloscope to check
WBC/RBC/PLT
result, or the result
analog
part
whether the analog channel
result
displays ***
channel error, AD
can output correct signals. If
collection error or
no
algorithm
check the amplification stage
identification error
by stage, and check the AD
zapping error
17
signal
is
detected,,
collection and data uploading

as well.
18
WBC/RBC/PLT
WBC/RBC/PLT
Bad
background
background
constant
abnormal
abnormal
shielding,
First ensure the bath and the
current
fluidics work normally, and
source abnormal,
then check the shielding and
analog
grounding,
channel
check
resistor-capacitor
components
components
resistors) of the constant
incorrect
abnormal
or
(such
as
current source, or check the

resistor-capacitor
and
operation amplifier of the

signal conditioning channel.
5-56
Hardware System
Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part
No.
1
Error
System startup failed
Causes and solutions

Possible causes: input power supply error, including
improper power cord connection, abnormal power
supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that
causes
the
operating
system
to
fail
to
be
downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error

that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system
clock abnormal.
Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system,
and then check whether the error still exists; check
whether the power indicator D51 is on; check
whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to
check the voltage of each power supply; use an
oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal
oscillator output X2 is normal.
2
Network communication failed
Possible causes: network connection abnormal;

using non-standard network cable; network chip
damaged, etc.
Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with
the specified shielding-cross network cable. If
nothing is wrong with the network connection and the
settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output
by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip
U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Abnormal communication with
Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip
UART of autoloader board
U66 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check whether the interface signals are
normal by an oscilloscope.
volumetric board signals, laser
shielding box status and right
U74 damaged.
door status can not be detected

proper;
check
the
interface
signals
by
an
oscilloscope.
5
Abnormal communication with
UART of drive board
U67 damaged.
proper;
check
oscilloscope.
5-57
the
interface
signals
by
an
Hardware System
6
Events of Aspirate Key, Count
Key and Compartment Door
U67 damaged.
Open Key can not be detected,
or the buzzer and indicator on
proper;
the indicator board are out of
oscilloscope.
control.
5-58
check
the
interface
signals
by
an
Hardware System
5.3 Drive board

5.3.1 Introduction
The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters
etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of
temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.

Function
Serial communication
Driving stepping motors
Driving valves and pumps
Temperature control
Pressure control
System status detection
Reagent status detection
Block diagram
2-channel temperature
measurement
2-channel pressure measurement
3-channel power voltage
measurement
Temperature
Pressure
Power
Voltage
(anolog
signal)
Databoard
UART
8-channel Step-motor driver

module
RD
A/D[7:0]
IN
A[15:8]
EN
C8051F020
TDI
CLK
TDO
F_INT
CLK
F_NCONFIG
LATCH
NCSO
BN
HOLD
RXD
MOTOR
A3979
SLEEP
WR
TXD
AN
MS2
STEP
ALE
TMS
Databoard
JTAG
A
MS1
EP1C6Q240C8
DATA
74HC595
+
IRLML2502
SV1~SV40
40
40-channel solenoid valve

control
DCLK
ASDO
M_SEN
Pump
Heater
HOA0880T51
CD74HC14
20-channel motor position sensor
detection
EPCS1S18N
7-channel high power pump & valve
control
2-channel heater control
LSEN/SWITCH
74LVCR2245
Liquid level sensor

or sensitive switch
8-channel liquid level sensor & sensitive switch detection
Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board
5-59
Hardware System
Description
Serial communication
The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial
communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication
with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and
responds accordingly. Communication parameters:
Baud Rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Parity: even
UART1 is reserved.
Stepping motor driving
The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the
control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the
motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample
injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe
motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.
Valve and pump driving
The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34
valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU
writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the
data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip
74HC595, and drive the valves through the MOS transistor IRLML2502. The MCU first sends
the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip
ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively.
Temperature Control
The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the
optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values,
the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends
heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two
heaters.
Air pressure control
The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure
chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by
5-60
Hardware System
the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of
the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output
to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is
adjusted.
System status detection
The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother
board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter.
Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and
amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD
conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained.
The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive
board.
Reagent status detection
The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection
channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the
following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.
The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612
receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals
(including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard
directly. The connectors layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure
below.
5-61
Hardware System
Liquid level sensor

Optical train temperature
Reaction pool temperature
Ambient temperature
Position sensor
JTAG
UART
Pressure
Valve
PUMP
Heater
2-channel step-motor
6-channel step-motor
+24V
+5V
+12V
Base board
PB2 Socket
PB1 Socket
PB3 Socket
J4
J5
Board mounting
bracket & guide
channel
J3
Socket 96Pin
96Pin
Driver board
J9
J1
Support board
J2
J10 J8
Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board

The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table.
Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board
Connector
J1
J2
J3
Number of
Function
Note
pins
FPGA configuration interface

(AS mode)
FPGA Debug Interface
10
10
Interface with the motherboard
96
Used when FPGA first

downloading
Not used on complete
device
Control
interface
of
valves,
pumps
and
detection
and
heaters
J4
96
J5
96
J8
J9
J10
Communication
Debug
Interface
MCU Debug Interface
Communication
4
10
Debug
Interface
5-62
Sensor
communication interface
Motor control interface
device
Used when MCU first
downloading
device
Hardware System
Definition of J1
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).

Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration
Pin
Name
Pin
Name
F_DCLK
AGND
F_CONFDONE
VDD
F_CONFIG
F_NCE
F_DATA
F_NCSC
F_ASDO
10
GND
Definition of J2
J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode).

Definition of J3
J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves,
pumps and heaters control.
Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3
Pin
Definition
Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
PGND
Power ground
12V0
12V power supply
19
SV1
Control signal for Valve 1
20
SV4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5-63
Hardware System
21
SV7
22
SV10
23
SV13
24
SV16
25
SV19
26
SV22
27
SV25
28
SV28
29
SV31
30
SV34
31
SV37
32
SV40
33
M7-A
34
M7-AN
35
M7-B
36
M7-BN
37
M8-A
38
M8-AN
39
M8-B
40
M8-BN
41
HT1-DRV
Control end of the reaction bath heater
42
HT2-DRV
Control end of the optical system heater
43
PGND
Power ground
44
PUMP7
Control signal for Pump 7 (Reserved. No output)
45
PUMP6
46
PUMP5
47
PUMP4
48
PUMP3
Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)
49
PUMP2
50
PUMP1
Control signal for pressure pump (P1)
51
Sv2
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe

X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
5-64
Hardware System
52
SV5
53
SV8
54
SV11
55
SV14
56
SV17
57
SV20
58
SV23
59
SV26
60
SV29
61
SV32
62
SV35
63
SV38
64
NC
Empty
65
M7-A
66
M7-AN
67
M7-B
68
M7-BN
69
M8-A
70
M8-AN
71
M8-B
72
M8-BN
73
HT1-DRV
Control end of the reaction bath heater
74
HT2-DRV
Control end of the optical system heater
75
PGND
Power ground
76
PUMP7
77
PUMP6
78
PUMP5
79
PUMP4
Control signal for pinch valve V39
80
PUMP3
81
PUMP2
82
PUMP1
Control signal for pressure pump (P1)

X motor (SM 7)
X motor (SM 7)
X motor (SM 7)
X motor (SM 7)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
Y motor (SM 8)
5-65
Hardware System
83
SV3
84
SV6
85
SV9
86
SV12
87
SV15
88
SV18
89
SV21
90
SV24
91
SV27
92
SV30
93
SV33
94
SV36
95
SV39
96
NC
Empty
Definition of J4
J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor
detection and communication.
Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4
Pin
Name
Note
PRTO_T1
Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)
PRTO_T2
Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)
PRESSURE_1ST_A
Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)
GND
GND
VCC
5V power supply
17
GND
GND
18
LIQ_SIN1
Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5-66
Hardware System
19
LIQ_SIN3
Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor
20
LIQ_SIN5
Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)
21
LIQ_SIN7
Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor
22
LS_CTRL
Control signal for liquid-level sampling
23
GND
Digital ground
24
VC_SIN17
Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)
25
VC_SIN18
26
VC_SIN19
27
VC_SIN20
28
VC_SIN1
29
M_SIN2
30
VC_SIN4
31
M_SIN5
32
VC_SIN7
33
PRTO_REF
Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
34
PRTO_REF
Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal
35
PRESSURE_2ST_A
Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)
GND
Digital ground
VCC
5V power supply
49
GND
Digital ground
50
LIQ_SIN2
Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor
51
LIQ_SIN4
Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor
52
LIQ_SIN6
Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor
Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position

sensor (OP1)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe
initial position sensor (OP 2)
Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position
sensor (OP 4)
Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position
sensor (OP 5)
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
5-67
Hardware System
53
54
55
LIQ_SIN8
Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)
GND
Digital ground
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17
56
M_SIN17
57
M_SIN18
58
M_SIN19
59
M_SIN20
60
M_SIN1
61
VC_SIN3
62
M_SIN4
63
VC_SIN6
64
M_SIN7
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)
65
AMBINET_T_A
Input signal of ambient temperature sensor
GND
Digital ground
VCC
5V power supply
81
GND
Digital ground
82
TMS
TMS signal of JTAG interface
83
TCK
Clock signal of JTAG interface
(reserved)
(reserved)
(reserved)
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial
position sensor (OP 1)
Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position
sensor (OP 3)
Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position
sensor (OP 4)
Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP
6)
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
5-68
Hardware System
84
TDI
Data input pin of JTAG interface
85
TDO
Data output pin of JTAG interface
GND
Digital ground
88
UP_TX
Serial port sending data signal (UART0)
89
UP_RX
Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)
GND
Digital ground
86
87
90
91
92
VC_SIN2
93
M_SIN3
94
VC_SIN5
95
M_SIN6
96
VC_SIN8
Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial

Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial
Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position
sensor (OP 5)
Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor
(OP 6)
Definition of J5
J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the
stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection.
Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5
Pin
Definition
Note
M_SIN8
VC_SEN10
Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)
M_SIN11
VC_SEN13
Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)
M_SIN14
VC_SEN16
GND
Digital ground
NC
Empty
24V0
24V power supply
Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP

14)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor
(OP 16)
10
11
12
13
5-69
Hardware System
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PGND
Power ground
33
VC_SEN9
Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
34
M_SIN10
35
VC_SEN12
36
M_SIN13
37
VC_SEN15
38
M_SIN16
39
GND
Digital ground
40
NC
Empty
41
M1_A
42
M1_AN
43
M1_B
44
M1_BN
29
30
31
32
Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP

10)
Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12)
Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP
13)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor
(OP 15)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position
sensor (OP 16)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
5-70
Hardware System
45
M2_A
46
M2_AN
47
M2_B
48
M2_BN
49
M3_A
50
M3_AN
51
M3_B
52
M3_BN
53
M4_A
54
M4_AN
55
M4_B
56
M4_BN
57
M5_A
58
M5_AN
59
M5_B
60
M5_BN
61
M6_A
62
M6_AN
63
M6_B
64
M6_BN
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection

syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
5-71
Hardware System
6, reserved)
65
M_SIN9
Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)
66
VC_SEN11
67
M_SIN12
68
VC_SEN14
69
M_SIN15
70
DCM
DC motor control signal (reserved)
71
GND
Digital ground
72
NC
Empty
73
M1_A
74
M1_AN
75
M1_B
76
M1_BN
77
M2_A
78
M2_AN
79
M2_B
80
M2_BN
81
M3_A
82
M3_AN
83
M3_B
84
M3_BN
85
M4_A
86
M4_AN
Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP

12)
Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position
sensor (OP 15)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor

(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
5-72
Hardware System
87
M4_B
88
M4_BN
89
M5_A
90
M5_AN
91
M5_B
92
M5_BN
93
M6_A
94
M6_AN
95
M6_B
96
M6_BN
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor

(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)
Definition of J8
J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.
Definition of J9
J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode).

Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9
Pin
Name
Pin
Name
VDD
GND
GND
TCK
TMS
TDO
TDI
NC
GND
10
NC
Definition of J10
J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.
5-73
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board
5-74
Hardware System

Table 5-64 LED definition
Indicator
D1
D2
D49
D50
D51
D52
Note
FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration.
FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works
normally.
24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power
supply is normal.
3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power
supply is normal.
12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power
supply is normal.
5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog
power supply is normal.
D65
MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.
D66
Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.
D67
Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during

heating.

Table 5-65 Test point definition
No.
Name
Pin
Note
TP1
PIN26 of U2
FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG
TP2
PIN28 of U2
TP3
PIN228 of U2
TP4
PIN50 of U2
Read signals of MCU external bus /RD
TP5
PIN20 of U2
FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT
TP6
PIN73 of U2
Write signals of MCU external bus /WR
FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals

FPGA_CLK
Address latch enabling signals of MCU
external bus ALE
5-75
Hardware System
7
TP7
PIN11 of U2
TP8
1V5
TP9
SIO_IN
Data input signals of MCU valve control chip
10
TP10
SIO_CLK
Clock signals of MCU valve control chip
11
TP11
SIO_EN
Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip
12
TP12
SIO_LATCH
Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip
13
TP13
PIN17 of U10
14
TP14
PIN15 of U9
15
TP16
PIN15 of U21
16
TP17
PIN13 of U20
17
TP18
PIN17 of U20
18
TP19
PIN17 of U25
19
TP20
PIN16 of U26
20
TP21
PIN11 of U10
21
TP22
VDD
22
TP23
23
TP24
24
TP25
1V5
25
TP26
PIN1 of U32
26
TP27
ADC_VCC
27
TP28
ADC_12V
28
TP29
ADC_24V
29
TP30
PIN1 of U33
GND
FPGA reset signals F_RST

Voltage
of
+1.5VDC
power
supply
(1.50.075V)
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X

motor STEP7
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y
motor STEP8
Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe
motor STEP1
Stepping pulse signals of sample injection
syringe motor STEP2
Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe
motor STEP3
Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor
STEP4
Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe
motor STEP5
Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor
STEP6 (not used)
Voltage
of
+3.3VDC
power
supply
+1.5VDC
power
supply
detection
signals
(3.30.15V)
Digital ground
Voltage
of
(1.50.075V)
Ambient
temperature
(voltage) AMBINET_T
Detection signals of VCC+5VDC after
voltage-dividing 2.000.15V
Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after
Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after
Pressure
5-76
chamber
detection
signals
Hardware System
(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST
30
TP31
PIN7 of U33
31
TP34
PIN2 of U37
34
TP35
PIN100 of U35
35
TP36
PIN26 of U35
36
TP37
PIN99 of U35
37
TP38
PIN57 of U35
38
TP39
PIN6 of U45
39
TP40
PRTD_REF
40
TP41
PIN2 of U45
41
TP42
PIN3 of U45
42
TP43
PIN8 of U22
43
TP44
PIN8 of U23
44
TP45
PIN8 of U24
45
TP46
PIN8 of U29
46
TP47
PIN8 of U28
47
TP48
PIN8 of U27
48
TP49
PIN8 of U11
49
TP50
PIN8 of U13
Vacuum
chamber
detection
signals
(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST
Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital
module REFIN2.500.006V
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
channel 0
MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals
CLKIN
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
channel 1
MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK
Amplifier output signals of the temperature
collection module TEMPER_AD
Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals
of the temperature collection module
Reference voltage of temperature collection
module amplifier
Input voltage of temperature collection
module amplifier
Driving reference voltage of sample syringe
motor VREF1
Driving
reference
voltage
of
sample
injection syringe motor VREF2

Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe
motor VREF3
Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe
motor VREF4
Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe
motor VREF5
Driving reference voltage of reserved motor
VREF6 (not used)
Driving reference voltage of sample probe X
motor VREF7
Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y
motor VREF8
Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
5-77
Hardware System
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.

Purpose
The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if
any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.
Tools
Disassembly
Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the drive board from the main unit:
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;

2. Open the left door;
3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board,
and then draw the drive board out.
5-78
Hardware System
Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1

1---Hand-tightened screws
2---Drive board
Further disassembly of the drive board
(M3X6) from the drive board.
2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.
Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2

1---Drive board
3---Cross-recessed
2---Bracket
panhead
screw
M3x6 (with washer)

5-79
Hardware System
Assembly
Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.
Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.
Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board.
2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the drive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51
turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the self-test screen of
the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully;
otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
4. Readjust the sample probe position as per Section 6.10.1 and save the result.
Error analysis and solutions

Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the
form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with
the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error
names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the
screen as the software help information.
When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related
connections are properly connected. For example, when Sample probe action failed is
reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to
the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut
down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether
the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the
sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor
connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the
sample probe assembly if necessary).
5-80
Hardware System
Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error
according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the
error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive
board.
The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table.
Table 5-66 Troubleshooting errors with the drive board
Error code
Error name
Recommended
Error feature
action
FPGA does not allow the MCU write

data
into
the
valve-pump
data
register within 50ms, i.e. the serial

0100
Valve
output
failed
output status indication bit in the

register (which is used to judge the
Replace drive board
status of valves and pumps of

FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA
error or MCU read register error.
Valve NO. out
0101
of limit (greater
Download Valve NO. out of limit
than
(greater than 40 or equal to 0)
40
or
equal to 0)
Communication
abnormal. Please try
again.
1. X motor error, action
X motor failed
0201
to
move
to
target position
X motor does not move to the

pre-set target position after action
is interfered.
2.
position
motor
target
photocoupler
error.
X motor failed
to
0202
move
home
to
position
after

X motor is not at the home position
after initialization
initialization
X motor failed to leave home
position
position when initializing
after
initialization
0204
position
motor
initial
photocoupler
to leave home
Adjusting
2.
error.
X motor failed
0203
is interfered.
is interfered.
2.
position
motor
initial
photocoupler
error.
X
X motor does not move to target
motor to target
position after the adjusting command
position failed
is executed.
5-81

is interfered.
2.
position
motor
target
photocoupler
Hardware System
error.
Adjusting
0205
motor back to
home
position
failed
X
motor to leave
home
position
failed
X
0207
motor
adjustment
X
motor
adjusting steps
out of limit
X
0209
is interfered.
2.
is executed
position
motor
initial
photocoupler

X motor does not leave home
is interfered.
2.
is executed
position
motor
initial
photocoupler
error.
error
0208
X motor does not back to home
error.
Adjusting
0206
X motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
Re-send the X motor
9]
adjusting command
X motor adjusting steps at the target
Adjust the X motor
position are out of limit [-20, 20]
again
motor
The position in the X motor adjusting
end
end command disagrees with the
adjusting
position error
pre-send adjusting position
Re-send the X motor

adjusting command
1. Y motor error, action
Y motor failed
0211
to
move
to
target position
Y motor does not move to the

pre-set target position after action
is interfered.
2.
position
motor
target
photocoupler
error.
Y motor failed
0212
to initialize to
upper position
Y motor is not at the upper position

after initialization
is interfered.
2.
position
motor
upper
photocoupler
error.
Y motor failed
0213
to initialize to
lower position
Y motor does not move to
lower
position when initializing
is interfered.
2.
position
motor
lower
photocoupler
error.
Y
Y motor does not move to target
is interfered.
motor to target
2.
position failed
is executed.
position
Adjusting
0214
error.
5-82
motor
target
photocoupler
Hardware System
Y
Y motor does not back to upper
is interfered.
motor to upper
2.
position failed
is executed
position
Adjusting
0215
motor
upper
photocoupler
error.
Adjusting
0216
motor to leave
upper
position
failed
Y
0217
motor
error
0218
motor
adjusting steps
out of limit
Y
0219
adjusting
0220
is interfered.
2.
is executed
position
Y motor adjusting steps at the target
Adjust the Y motor
position are out of limit [-63,63]
again
end command disagrees with the

pre-send adjusting position
probe
is
adjust
sample probe
0226
sample
probe command after
finished.
the
the
sample
probe
upward/downward/leftward/rightward
by one step before sending the
The action time is longer than the
overtime
download time.
X motor action
forbidden
match
current position
0225
the
X motor or Y motor action is not
X motor action
not
adjusting command
sample
probe
action is finished
X motor does
0224
Re-send the Y motor
Send
adjusting command.
0223
photocoupler
adjusting command
Can not send the command to move
0222
upper
6]
end
assembly
Cannot
motor
Re-send the Y motor
The position in the Y motor adjusting
working
0221
Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1,
motor
position error
Sample
Y motor does not leave upper
error.
adjustment
Y
You can adjust the

sample
after
probe
the
only
adjusting
command is sent.
X motor is not at the photocoupler
Move the Y motor to
position or Y motor is not at the
upper
upper photocoupler position
position
X motor current position does not

match the photocoupler position
photocoupler
Initialize the X motor
Y motor action
overtime
download time.
X motor action
X motor is not at the photocoupler
Move the X motor to
forbidden
position
the
5-83
photocoupler
Hardware System
position
Y motor does
0227
not
match
current position
Y motor failed
0228
to
pierce
to
lower position
Y motor failed
0229
to
pierce
to
upper position
X
0230
motor
photocoupler
error
Sample
0231
RBC
Y motor current position does not

match the photocoupler position
Y motor is not at the lower position
after piercing
Y motor failed to back to upper
position when piercing
Initialize the Y motor
Pierce again
Pierce again
X motor photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
RBC bath photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
WBC bath photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
DIFF bath photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
Y motor photocoupler might be
Replace
damaged
photocoupler
motor
probe
bath
photocoupler
RBC
bath
error
Sample
0232
WBC
probe
bath
photocoupler
WBC
bath
error
Sample
0233
DIFF
probe
bath
photocoupler
DIFF
bath
error
Y
0234
motor
photocoupler
error
Sample
0235
motor
probe
upper
Upper
photocoupler
photocoupler
damaged
might
be
Replace
the
upper
photocoupler
error
Sample
0236
probe
lower
Lower
photocoupler
damaged
photocoupler
might
be
Replace
the
lower
photocoupler
error
Sampling syringe does not finish the
Sampling
0300
syringe
working
is
previous action when it is requested

for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
dispensing.
5-84
Command is sent early

while
the
sampling
syringe is still working.
Hardware System
1.
Sampling
syringe
photocoupler error (if

Sampling
0301
The detected photocoupler signals
syringe
are without any change before and
photocoupler
after action.
abnormal
sampling
syringe
motor moves)
2.
Sampling
motor
syringe
error
sampling
(if
syringe
motor dose not move)

1.
Sampling
syringe
0302
Sampling
After aspirating or dispensing, the
syringe
sampling syringe should be at the
aspirating
or
home position, but the position
dispensing
detected
action failed 1
disagrees
by
the
photocoupler
the sampling syringe

motor is at the home
position)
2.
Sampling
motor
error
sampling
syringe
(if
the
syringe
motor is not at the

home position)
1.
Sampling
syringe
0303
Sampling
syringe
sampling syringe should not be at
aspirating
or
the home position, but the position
dispensing
detected
action failed 2
disagrees
by
the
photocoupler
the
sample
syringe
motor is not at the

home position)
2.
Sampling
motor
error
sampling
syringe
(if
the
syringe

position)
Sampling
syringe
0304
aspirating
or
dispensing
forbidden
Sampling
syringe
0305
dispensing
action
forbidden 2
Sampling
sampling syringe should be at the
home
position
action
aspirating
Before aspirating or dispensing, the
or
position,
but
detected
syringe
the
actual
by
the
photocoupler disagrees
position)
Sampling
sampling syringe should not be at
the home position, but the actual
position
motor is not at the
detected
photocoupler disagrees
5-85
by
the
home position)
syringe
Hardware System
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with
Sample syringe
0306
aspirate volume
over range

Requested
volume
aspirated
volume > maximum aspirate volume
aspirating
and
dispensing action; then

consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Sample syringe
0307
dispense
aspirating
Requested
volume
over
volume
>
aspirated
and

volume
range
debugging phase and

note the volume add
up error.
Sampling
0308
syringe
action
overtime
0310

download time.
Sample
Sample injection syringe does not
injection
finish the previous action when it is
while
requested for initializing, resetting,
injection syringe is still
aspirating or dispensing.
working.
syringe
is
working
1.
Sample
syringe
error
Sample
0311
injection
syringe
photocoupler
after action.
the
sample
injection
photocoupler
(if
sample
injection syringe motor

moves)
2.
Sample
injection
syringe motor error (if
abnormal
sample
injection
syringe motor does not

move)
Sample
injection
0312
syringe should be at the home
syringe
aspirating
dispensing
or
position, but the position detected by

the photocoupler disagrees
5-86
1.
Sample
syringe
error
injection
photocoupler
(if
sample
injection syringe is at
the home position)
Hardware System
action failed 1
2.
Sample
injection

sample
injection
syringe is not at the

home position)
1.
Sample
syringe
Sample
0313
error
injection
photocoupler
(if
sample
injection
injection syringe is not
syringe
syringe should not be at the home
at the home position)
2.
aspirating
or
dispensing
action failed 2
Sample
sample
injection
injection
syringe is at the home

position)
Sample
injection
syringe
0314
aspirating
or
dispensing

action
Sample
injection
syringe
photocoupler
error
(if
sample
injection syringe is at
the home position)
forbidden 1
Sample
injection
syringe
0315
aspirating
or
dispensing

action
Sample
injection
syringe
photocoupler
error
(if
sample
injection syringe is not

forbidden 2
Check and make sure
Sample
injection
0316
syringe aspirate
volume
over
Requested
volume
aspirated
aspirating
and

range

debugging phase.
Sample
0317
injection
syringe
Requested
volume
volume
>
aspirated
Check and make sure

5-87
Hardware System
dispense
aspirating
volume
over
and
range
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
Sample
0318
injection
syringe

action
download time.
overtime
0320
sheath
fluid
syringe
is
working
Sheath fluid syringe does not finish

the previous action when it is
requested for initializing, resetting,
aspirating or dispensing.

while the sheath fluid
1. Sheath fluid syringe
Sheath
0321
fluid
syringe

photocoupler
after action.
abnormal
sheath
fluid
syringe
motor moves)
motor error (if sheath
fluid
syringe
motor
dose not move)

Sheath
fluid
syringe
0322
aspirating
or
dispensing
action failed 1
sheath
fluid
syringe
position)

fluid syringe motor is
not
at
the
home
position)
Sheath
fluid
syringe
0323
aspirating
or
dispensing
action failed 2


sheath
fluid
syringe
motor is not at the

home position)
5-88
Hardware System
fluid syringe motor is
Sheath
fluid
Sheath
dispensing
sample syringe motor
action
is at the home position)
syringe
0324
aspirating
or
fluid
syringe
forbidden 1
Sheath
fluid
syringe
0325
aspirating
or
dispensing
action
Sheath
fluid
syringe

sample syringe motor
is not at the home
position)
forbidden 2
Check and make sure

Sheath
0326
fluid
syringe aspirate
Requested
volume
over
volume
aspirated
range
aspirating
and

debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Sheath
syringe
0327
aspirating
Requested
dispense
volume
fluid
over
volume
>
aspirated
volume
and

range
debugging phase and

note the volume add
up error.
0328
Sheath
fluid
syringe
action
overtime

download time.
Lyse syringe does not finish the
0330
Lyse syringe is
working

dispensing.
0331
Lyse
syringe

5-89

while the lyse syringe
is still working.
1.
Lyse
syringe
Hardware System
photocoupler
abnormal
after action.
the lyse syringe motor

moves)
2. Lyse syringe motor
error
(if
the
lyse
syringe motor does not

move)
1.
Lyse
syringe

dispensing
action failed 1
error
Lyse
0332
syringe
aspirating
or
(if
the
lyse
syringe motor is not at

the home position)
1.
Lyse
syringe

Lyse
0333
syringe
aspirating
or

dispensing
action failed 2

is not at the home
position)
error
(if
the
lyse
syringe motor is at the

home position)
Lyse
syringe
aspirating
0334
or
dispensing
action
forbidden 1
Lyse
syringe
aspirating
0335
or
dispensing
action
forbidden 2
Lyse

Lyse
syringe
syringe

is not at the home
position)
Check and make sure
Lyse
0336
syringe
aspirate volume
over range

Requested
volume
aspirated

aspirating
and

5-90
Hardware System
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Lyse
0337
syringe
dispense
volume
aspirating
Requested
over
volume
>
aspirated
volume
and

range

debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
0338
Lyse
syringe
action overtime

download time.
Diluent syringe does not finish the
0340
Diluent syringe
is working

dispensing.

while
the
diluent

1.
Diluent
syringe
0341
Diluent syringe
photocoupler
abnormal
after action.
the
diluent
syringe
motor moves)
2.
Diluent
motor
syringe
error
(if
the
diluent syringe motor

dose not move)
1.
Diluent
syringe

the
0342
diluent
syringe
Diluent syringe
aspirating
position)
dispensing
2.
action failed 1
motor
or
Diluent
error
syringe
(if
the
diluent syringe motor is

not
at
the
home
position)
0343
Diluent syringe
1.
aspirating
dispensing
the
action failed 2
motor is not at the
or
5-91
Diluent
diluent
syringe
syringe
Hardware System
home position)
2.
Diluent
motor
syringe
error
(if
the
diluent syringe motor is

Diluent syringe
aspirating
0344
or
dispensing
forbidden 1
Diluent syringe
0345

action
aspirating
or
dispensing

forbidden 2
syringe

the
diluent
syringe

position)
action
Diluent
Diluent
syringe

the
diluent
syringe
motor is not at the

home position)
Check and make sure
Diluent syringe
0346
aspirate volume
over range

Requested
volume
aspirated
aspirating
and

debugging phase.
Check and make sure
Diluent syringe
0347
dispense
volume
aspirating
Requested
over
volume
>
aspirated
volume
and

range

debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.
0348
Diluent syringe
action overtime
download time.
Automatic
0390
Start testing the motors before the
testing
automatic
command
Reaction
command
is
received.
forbidden
0401
testing
bath
First
start
the
automatic
testing
command, and then

test the motors.
The reaction bath temp. setup is out

5-92
Re-set
the
reaction
Hardware System
0402
temp. setup out
of
the
MCU
pre-set
range
of limit
[30,50]
Optical system
The optical system temp. setup is
temp. setup out
out of the MCU pre-set range
of limit
[30,50]
bath temperature
Re-set
the
optical
system temperature
1. Check whether the
heater of the reaction
0403
Reaction
bath
temp. error
Reaction bath temperature is out of

the set range
bath is well connected.

temperature collection
channel of the reaction
bath is normal.
heater of the optical
system
0404
is
well
Optical system
Optical system temperature is out of
connected.
temp. error
the set range

temperature collection
channel of the optical
system is normal.
Reaction
0405
bath
temp.
Compensation
compensation
complement code dont match
value
and
ones
Optical system
0406
Compensation
value
and
compensation
ones
0407
compensation
error
Reaction
0408
bath
temp.
compensation
out of limit
Optical system
0409
temp.
compensation
out of limit
Compensation
value
and
bath
reaction
temp.
Reset
the
system
optical
temp.
compensation
error
Ambient temp.
the
compensation
error
temp.
Reset
ones
Reset
the
ambient
temp. compensation
Reaction bath temp. compensation
Reset
out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7
bath
compensation
Optical system temp. compensation
Reset
out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7
system
compensation
5-93
the
reaction
temp.
the
optical
temp.
Hardware System
Ambient temp.
040a
compensation
out of limit
Ambient temp. compensation out of
Reset
the set range [-12.7, 12.7]
temp. compensation
the
ambient
1. The actual ambient

temperature is out of
the working range.
0501
Ambient temp.
Ambient temperature is out of the set
abnormal
range
temperature
transducer
and
measurement
the
circuit
work normally.
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
whether the pressure
Controlling
0601
pressure
The pressure in the chamber can not
pump works normally.
chamber
reach the target range within the
pressure
specified fluidics time.
pressure sensor works

normally and whether
failed
the pressure detection

signals of the MCU are
normal.
whether the vacuum
Controlling
0602
vacuum
chamber
vacuum failed
The vacuum in the chamber can not

reach the target range within the
specified fluidics time.
pump and valve 30

and 31 works normally.
normal.
Adjusting
0603
pressure
chamber
pressure failed
0604
Adjusting
Wait and then send the

The pressure in the chamber is
adjusting
being controlled. Can not send the
again
adjusting command
previous
command
after
the
pressure
controlling is done.
The vacuum in the chamber is being
5-94
Wait and then send the
Hardware System
vacuum
controlled.
chamber
adjusting command
Can
not
send
the
vacuum failed
adjusting
again
command
after
previous
the
vacuum
controlling is done.
whether the pressure
Pressure
0605
chamber
The pressure in the chamber is out
pressure out of
of the set range
limit
pump works normally.

normal.
whether the vacuum
Vacuum
0606
pump and valve 30
chamber
The vacuum in the chamber is out of
and 31 works normally.
vacuum out of
the set range
limit

normal.
Pressure
chamber
0607
The pressure control of the pressure
pressure
control
range
chamber is of negative range.
Re-send
the
control
command of positive
range
error
Vacuum
0608
chamber
The vacuum control of the vacuum
vacuum control
chamber is of positive range
range error
FPGA
0701
download mark
error
0702
FPGA
Wrong download mark. It is not ':'

start
The download command is not
5-95
Re-send
the
control
command of negative
range
Re-download
Re-download
Hardware System
download
defined.
command error
Read
0703
all
configuration
chip
content
Finish reading data
finished
Data write out
The data written for a single time
of limit
exceeds the maximum of 32 digits
Data write and
The
head-address
head-address exceed the maximum
over range
content of one page (256 bytes).
0706
Write forbidden
Failed to write the configuration chip
0707
Write overtime
Write delay exceeds 10ms
0704
0705
data
written
plus
Re-download
the
Re-download
Send
the
enabling
command first
Re-download
1. Check the EEPROM
circuit
for
any
missing-soldered
component; check the
EEPROM pin for short
0731
circuit and missolder,
Write-in
EEPROM error
Failed to write data into EEPROM
etc.
2. If short circuit is not
found
and
components
properly
soldered,
all
are
it
indicates the EEPROM

is damaged.
Functional code
0801
in the control
code error
0802
0803
0804
0805
Data
length
error
The functional code is not defined in

the communication rules.
again.
Communication
corresponding data length of the
current command label
again.
The command label is not defined in
error

code
The data length mismatches the
Command label
Check
Communication
The check code mismatches the
error
calculated one
End code error
The end code is not the one defined

5-96
Communication
again.
Communication
again.
Communication
Hardware System
in the communication rules. (016)

again.
Identity code in
0806
the control code

error
None-sequence
0817
pack
analysis
error
The identity code is not defined in

Unable
to
analyze
Communication
again.
the
none-sequence pack command
Re-send
the
correct
command
Troubleshooting special errors

1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure
If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway
for leakage.
If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged
pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.
The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table
for the voltage and pressure.
Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures
Pressure
Pressure
channel
range
Pressure
chamber
2.54kPa
Test point
Relation
between
sensor
output voltage and pressure
Note
P
TP30
represents
pressure, and
its unit is kPa.
Vacuum
-8
chamber
-40kPa
P = (Vout 1.25) 250

TP31
Volt
represents the
voltage of the
test point, and
its unit is V
2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action

To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are
usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per
the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.
Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the
mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive
components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then
5-97
Hardware System
the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be
replaced.
If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are
jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive
photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in
position.
If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace
the photocoupler.
If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the
error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.
5-98
Hardware System
5.4 Autoloader board

5.4.1 Introduction
The autoloader board is to feed and mix blood samples, as well as scan barcode information
on tubes.

Function
Stepping motor control
Electromagnet control
Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection
Scanner control
Parameter storage
Block diagram
EEPROM
Clock
Scanner
Solenoid
UART1
C8051F020
FPGA
Configuration
Device
Reset
FPGA Reset
Power
Board
D 5V
P 12V
P 24V
Digital 5V
LDO
3.3V
3.3V
LDO
1.5V
SMXM
SMZM
SMRM
Sample Feed
SFXM
SFYM
Sensor
Status
Config
Config
Reset
IRQ
Sample Mix
1
Step Motor Control
BUS
EP1C3T14
4
Interface
JTAG UART0
Mother Board
RS422
Clock
Sensor
Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the autoloader board
Description
Stepping motor drive
The autoloader board provide the drive control to the following five stepping motors:
X-co motor of the mix mechanism
Z-co motor of the mix mechanism
Mix motor
5-99
Hardware System
X-co loading motor
Y-co feeding motor
The stepping motor drive is a type of bipolar consist-current half-step drive, and there are
position sensors corresponding to the stepping motors to detect their positions.
Electromagnet control
The electromagnet is used to control the process of opening the sample compartment door
(manual close).
Built-in scanner control
The built-in scanner control is used to read barcodes on tubes and tube racks. The autoloader
board controls the built-in scanner through MCU, and the UART communication between MCU
and the built-in scanner through Serial port 1.
Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection
There are 13 position sensor and 1 sensitive switch on the autoloader. The status of the
sensors and switch is detected by FPGA, and MCU will check the status value of the FPGA
internal storage when necessary.
Parameter storage
As there may be manufacture or installation errors, it is necessary to adjust the initial positions
for the X-co motor of the mix mechanism and the mix motor. The adjusted position parameters
will be stored on the autoloader board.
The autoloader is configured with 14 external interfaces, shown as follows.
Table 5-68 External ports on the autoloader board
Interface
J1
J2
Number of pins
Function
FPGA
configuration
interface (AS mode)

FPGA debugging interface
(JTAG)
10
6
Description
FPGA
downloading
FPGA
debugging
J3
Electromagnet interface
J4
Reserved
Not applied to
J5
Power interface
the unit
J6
J7
Mix
mechanism
sensor
interface
Feeding
unit
sensor
interface 1
5-100
20
20
Hardware System
Feeding
J8
unit
sensor
20
interface 2
J10
Reserved
MCU
J11
configuration
/
/
10
interface
J12
Communication interface
J14
Feeding motor interface
Control the X-co motor and

J15
/
8
Z-co motor of the mix

mechanism
J16
Mix motor interface
P1
Built-in scanner interface
15
Definition of J1:
J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).

Table 5-69 Definition of the FPGA configuration interface
Pin
1
3
5
7
9
Name
Pin
F_DCLK
F_CONFDONE
F_CONFIG
F_DATA
F_ASDO
2
4
6
8
10
Name
AGND
VDD
F_NCE
F_NCSC
GND
Definition of J3:
J3 is the electromagnet interface.

Table 5-70 Definition of the electromagnet interface
Pin
Name
Description
12V0
solenoid
Working power supply for the

electromagnet
Control
signal
for
the
electromagnet
Mark
on
Wire
SOLENOID
Level
Note
12V
Current:1A
Definition of J5:
Table 5-71 Definition of the power interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
D+5V
P+12V
P+24V
GND
PGND
PGND
Description
5V power supply (digital)
12V power supply (power)
24V power supply (power)
Digital ground
Power ground
Power ground
5-101
Hardware System
Definition of J6:
J6 is the mix mechanism sensor interface.

Table 5-72 Definition of the mix mechanism sensor interface
Pin
1
Name
V_X_START
X_START
3
4
5
GND
GND
V_X_END
X_END
7
8
9
GND
GND
V_Z_START
10
Z_START
11
12
13
GND
GND
V_Z_END
14
Z_END
15
16
17
GND
GND
V_R_START
18
R_START
19
20
21
GND
GND
V_SYRINGE
22
SYRINGE
23
24
GND
GND
Description
Sending end power signal of
X-co initial position
Photocoupler signal of X-co
initial position
Ground
Ground
X-co end position
Photocoupler signal of X-co
end position
Ground
Ground
Z-co initial position
Photocoupler signal of Z-co
initial position
Ground
Ground
Z-co end position
Photocoupler signal of Z-co
end position
Ground
Ground
mix mechanism initial position
Photocoupler signal of mix
mechanism initial position

the sampling position
Photocoupler signal of the
sampling position
Ground
Ground
Definition of J7:
J7 is the feeding sensor interface.
5-102
Mark on Wire
Note
MX_START
Transmissive
sensor
MX_END
Transmissive
sensor
MZ_START
Transmissive
sensor
MZ_END
Transmissive
sensor
MR_START
Transmissive
sensor
Preserved
Transmissive
sensor
Hardware System
Table 5-73 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 1
Pin
Name
Description
V_X_START
Sending end power signal of the

photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
initial position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
initial position
end position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
end position
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
Sending end power signal of the right
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
Ground
Receiving end power signal of the right
Sending end power signal of the left
Ground
Receiving end signal of the left
photocoupler for unloading initial
position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for unloading initial
position
Ground
Sensitive switch for X-co loading ready
position
3
5
GND
X_START
V_ X_END
4
6
GND
X_END
V_Y_START
9
11
GND
Y_START
V_Y_RIGHT
10
12
GND
Y_RIGHT
13
V_Y_LEFT
15
17
GND
Y_LEFT
14
V_UL_START
16
18
GND
UL_START
19
20
GND
X_READY
Definition of J8:
J8 is the other feeding sensor interface.

5-103
Mark
on
Wire
FX_START
Note
Transmissive
sensor
FX_END
Transmissive
sensor
FY_START
Transmissive
sensor
FY_RIGHT
Transmissive
sensor
FY_LEFT
Transmissive
sensor
F_UL_START
Transmissive
sensor
FX_READY
Sensitive
switch
Hardware System
Table 5-74 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 2
Pin
Name
Description
V_Y_READY
3
5
GND
VCC
Y_READY
V_UL_FULL
4
6
GND
VCC
UL_FULL
V_TUBE
11
GND
Sending end power signal of the Y-co

feeding ready photocoupler
Ground
Receiving end power signal of the Y-co
feeding ready photocoupler
Receiving end signal of the Y-co feeding
ready photocoupler
Sending
end
power
signal
of
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
Ground
Receiving end power signal of
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
Signal of photocoupler detecting full
unloading platform
Sending end power signal of tube
detecting photocoupler
Ground
13
VCC
15
10
TUBE
VT_RACK
12
14
GND
VCC
16
17
RACK
VC_DOOR
18
DOOR
19
20
GND
NC
Mark
Wire
Receiving end power signal of tube

detecting photocoupler
Tube detecting photocoupler signal
Sending end power signal of sample
volume sensor
Ground
Receiving end power signal of sample
volume sensor
Sample volume sensor signal
Sending end signal of sample
compartment door detecting sensor
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for initial unloading
position
Ground
Floating
Definition of J11:
J11 is the MCU configuration interface.
5-104
on
Note
Reserved
Reflective
photocoupler
F_UL_FULL
Reflective
photocoupler
F_TUBE
Reflective
photocoupler
Reserved
Reflective
photocoupler
DOOR
Reflective
photocoupler
Hardware System
Table 5-75 Definition of the MCU configuration interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
VDD
GND
GND
TCK
TMS
TDO
TDI
NC
GND
NC
Description
Power signal
Ground
Ground
JTAG clock
JTAG mode selection signal
JTAG output data signal
JTAG input data signal
Floating
Ground
Floating
Definition of J12:
J12 is the communication interface.

Table 5-76 Definition of the communication interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
Name
RX+
RXTX+
TX-
Description
Serial data receiving end
Definition of J14:
J14 is the feeding motor interface.

Table 5-77 Definition of the feeding motor interface
Pin
Name
Description
X_BN
Control signal of Phase A, X-co

loading motor
Control signal of Phase AN,
X-co loading motor
Control signal of Phase B, X-co
loading motor
Control signal of Phase BN,
X-co loading motor
Control signal of Phase A, Y-co
feeding motor
Y-co feeding motor
Control signal of Phase B, Y-co
feeding motor
Y-co feeding motor
X_B
X_AN
X_A
Y_BN
Y_B
Y_AN
Y_A
Mark on Wire
5-105
SFXM
SFYM
Hardware System
Definition of J15:
J15 is the control interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix mechanism.
Table 5-78 Definition of the interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix
mechanism
Pin
Name
Description
Mark on Wire
X_BN
X_B
X_AN
X_A
Z_BN
Z_B
Z_AN
Z_A

manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase B,
manipulator motor
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase A,
manipulator motor
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase B,
manipulator motor
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase A,
manipulator motor
X-co
SMXM
X-co
X-co
X-co
Z-co
Z-co
SMZM
Z-co
Z-co
Definition of J16:
J16 is the mix motor interface.

Table 5-79 Definition of the mix motor interface
Pin
Name
Description
R_BN
Control
motor
Control
motor
Control
motor
Control
motor
R_B
R_AN
R_A
Mark on Wire
signal of Phase BN, mix

SMRM
signal of Phase B, mix
signal of Phase AN, mix
signal of Phase A, mix
Definition of P1:
P1 is the built-in scanner interface.
5-106
Hardware System
Table 5-80 Definition of the built-in scanner interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Name
VCC
TXD
RXD
GND
NC
CTS
OUTPUT1
\
Trigger
RTS
OUTPUT3
\
Chassis
OUTPUT2
NC
Description
Power signal
Serial data sending end
Signal ground
Floating
Sending ready signal
Scanner out put signal 1
\
Trigger signal
Sending request signal
\
Shielding ground
Floating
5-107
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-19 Assembly drawing of the autoloader
5-108
Hardware System

Table 5-81 LED definition
Indicator
D3
D4
D5
D25
D26
Description
12V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power supply is
normal
5V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 5V power supply is
normal
3.3V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power supply is
normal
MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when MCU works
normally
FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when FPGA works
normally

Table 5-82 Test point definition
No.
Name
Pin
Note
TP1
PIN3 of X1
24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output

signal, FPGA working clock
TP2
PIN47 of U2
RD signals of MCU
TP3
PIN62 of U2
WR signals of MCU
TP4
PIN10 of U2
ALE signals of MCU
TP5
PIN28 of U2
FPGA reset signals
TP6
PIN5 of J1
FPGA configuration start signal
TP7
VCC
+5VDC voltage50.25V
TP8
12V0
+12VDC voltage (121.2V)
TP9
24V0
+24VDC voltage241.2V
10
TP10
VDD
+3.3VDC voltage3.30.15V
11
TP11
GND
12
TP12
GND
13
TP13
1V5
+1.5VDC voltage1.50.05V
14
TP15
TUBE
Tube detection photocoupler output signal

(0.4V when blocked, and 0.2V unblocked)
15
TP18
PIN3 of X2
24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output

signal, MCU working clock
5-109
Hardware System
16
TP21
PIN12 of U16
Stepping pulse signals of Y-co feeding

motor
17
TP23
PIN12 of U18
Stepping pulse signals of X-co feeding

motor
18
TP24
PIN12 of U22
Stepping pulse signals of Z-co mix motor
19
TP25
PIN12 of U23
Stepping pulse signals of X-co mix motor
20
TP26
PIN12 of U24
Stepping pulse signals of the mix motor
Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.

Purpose
The autoloader board is a key component. You should maintain or replace the board
immediately if any error or damage occurs. Follow the procedures to have the autoloader
board replaced.
Tools
Disassembly
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 panhead screws fixing the
shielding box, and then remove the box;
4. Unplug all the cords and connectors connected to the autoloader control board;
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the five M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the autoloader control board, and then remove the board.
5-110
Hardware System
Figure 5-20 Removing the autoloader control board

1 ---Shielding box
2 --- Panhead screw M4X8
3 --- Autoloader control board
4 ---Cross-headed panhead screw M3X6
Assembly
Assemble the autoloader control board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the autoloader
control board.
2. After ensuring the power supply is cut off, assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, and then power on the analyzer.
3. Check if the indicators on the autoloader control board are in the following status: 1) D3,
D4 and D5 turned on; 2) D25 and D26 flashing. You can also check the indicators in the
self-test screen of the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the autoloader control
board is replaced successfully; otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
5-111
Hardware System
4. Readjust the pincher position as per Section 6.10.2
Error analysis and solutions
Errors related to the autoloader board are identified and handled by the host control software
in the form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the autoloader board can be handled automatically, while some need to be
judged with the help of users or service engineers. When an error is reported, the error No.
and error names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may
appear on the screen as the software help information.
Most errors of the autoloader board are identified by checking the photocoupler information, so
check the photocouplers first in case of errors. To check the photocouplers: first make sure that
the photocouplers are not blocked, and check if the status information of the photocouplers
from the software matches the actual status; hide the photocouplers with lighttight material,
and check if the status information matches the actual status. Inconsistency found in either one
of the two checks indicates invalidation of the photocouplers; otherwise, the error comes from
the board itself.
Typical errors and solutions:
1. Y-co left or right photocoupler error

The cause of such an error: there two photocouplers mounted on the Y-co feeding direction of
the autoloader, which are called the left photocoupler and right photocoupler. In the
autoloading mode, the current tube feeding status is identified based on the number of times
when the level of the photocouplers jumped and the status of the photocouplers. Therefore,
the left and right photocouplers should be related with each other based on certain logical
requirements. If the requirements are not met, the Y-co left photocoupler or right photocoupler
error will be reported.
Troubleshooting measures: 1) check the photocouplers for errors (according to the steps
mentioned above); 2) Check if there is any tube rack blocked along the Y-co feeding line which
occurs when the Y-co feeding motor is not able to push the tube rack due to the tube rack out
of shape or assembly error of the sample transport unit. In such a case, shut down the
analyzer and switch off all the power supplies, and then pull the tube rack along the Y-co
feeding line to identify if the tube rack is out of shape and if the unit is mis-assembled. Replace
with a qualified tube rack if the former one is out of shape; disassemble and repair the sample
transport unit in case of mis-assembly; 3) check if there is any tube rack blocked because
there are tube racks slanting at the unloading area or the unloading platform is not qualified.
Check if the length of the tube rack meets the corresponding requirement and if the metallic
plate of the unloading unit is properly manufactured. 4) Check if the autoloader assembly
(including the buffer plates for the left and right photocouplers, Y-co pallet and Y-co tube rack
backboard) is properly assembled. If there is any mis-assembly, re-adjust the installation
5-112
Hardware System
according to the part related to mechanical structure of the analyzer in this manual, and make
sure the mechanism is out of error.
2. The compartment door cannot be opened

Possible causes for this error: a) compartment door photocoupler error; b) compartment spring
error or door structure error.
Troubleshooting measures: a) check if there is any error with the photocouplers; b) press the
[OPEN] key and check if the electromagnet moves. If the electromagnet acts properly, then
there may be errors with the spring or the mechanical structure of the door and replacement or
adjustment may be necessary.
Error codes and troubleshooting measures

Table 5-83 Troubleshooting errors with the autoloader board
ERR
Error name
Error feature
Recommended action
1. Check if there are EEPROM elements not
welded, EEPROM pin short or mis-welded
2. If there are no such errors, then it is
identified as an EEPROM error and board
replacement is needed
5A00
EEPROM write
error
Failed to write data to

EEPROM
5201
SMXM action
failed
Current action forbidden

while the mix mechanism is
in motion
5202
SMXM action
failed
5203
SMXM action
failed
5204
SMXM action
failed
SMZM or SMRM not at

home position
Check the Z-co and R-co photocouplers

replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be
a photocoupler error
5205
SMXM action
failed
SMXM not initialized, action

forbidden
Initialize the X-co motor
5206
SMXM action
failed
SMXM action overtime
Check if the predefined action time is

reasonable and the actual action speed of the
motor meets the requirement of the design
5207
SMXM action
failed
5208
SMXM action
failed
5209
SMXM
photocoupler
error
Confirm the action status of the mix

mechanism and resend the command
SMXM should not at the

home position, but the
home position photocoupler
is blocked
SMXM should at the home
position, but the home
position photocoupler is not
blocked
SMXM should not at the

end position, but the end
position photocoupler is
blocked
SMXM should at the end
position, but the end
blocked
Both the home position and
end position photocouplers
are blocked, then at least
one of them has an error
5-113
1. SMXM
home
position
photocoupler
error:
replace
the
photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a
photocoupler error
1.
SMXM end position photocoupler error:

replace the photocoupler when it is
confirmed to be an photocoupler error
1.
Check the SMXM home position and end

position photocoupler, and replace the
photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error
Hardware System
in motion
SMZM should not at the
is hide
SMZM should at the home
blocked
5401
SMZM action
failed
5402
SMZM action
failed
5403
SMZM action
failed
5404
SMZM action
failed
SMXM not at the end

position or SMRM not at the
home position
5405
SMZM action
failed
SMZM not initialized, action

forbidden
5406
SMZM action
failed
SMZM action overtime
5407
SMZM action
failed
SMZM should not at the

end position, but the end
position photocoupler is
blocked
5408
SMZM action
failed
5409
SMZM
photocoupler
error
5501
SMRM action
failed
5502
SMRM action
failed
5503
SMRM action
failed
5504
SMRM action
failed
SMXM or SMZM not at the

end position
5505
SMRM action
failed
SMRM not initialized, action

forbidden
Initialize the R-co motor
5506
SMRM action
failed
SMRM action overtime

SMRM action
failed
Mix mechanism
Not reach the target

position after finish moving
Action forbidden while the
5508
5601
SMZM should at the end

position, but the end
blocked
Both the home position and
end position photocouplers
are blocked, then at least
one of them has an error
in motion
SMRM should not at the
is blocked
SMRM should at the home
blocked
5-114
1.

1.
Home position photocoupler error:

replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
to be a photocoupler error
1.
Check
the
SMXM
and
SMRM
photocouplers,
and
replace
the
Initialize the Z-co motor

1. SMZM end position photocoupler error:
replace the photocoupler when it is
confirmed to be an photocoupler error
1.
Check the SMZM home position and end

position photocoupler, and replace the
1.

1.
SMRM home position photocoupler error:

replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
to be a photocoupler error
2.
Check
the
SMXM
and
SMZM
photocouplers,
and
replace
the
Check the SMRM motor and photocouplers

Hardware System
action failed
Mix mechanism
action failed
Mix mechanism
action failed
current mechanism is in
motion
Number of mixing times out
of predefined range
Mix mechanism not
initialized
5606
Mix mechanism
action failed
At least one of the 3 motors

is not at the home position
5700
SFXM action
failed
SFXM motor in motion
5701
SFXM action
failed
SFXM home position

photocoupler status does
not match the position of
the current motor
5702
SFXM action
failed
Tube rack along Y-co; X-co

motor forbidden to move to
the end position
5703
SFXM action
failed
SFXM end position

photocoupler status does
not match the position of
the current motor
5704
SFXM
photocoupler
error
Both the SFXM end position

and home position
photocouplers are blocked
5604
5605
5705
SFXM loading
error
Both the SFXM end position

photocoupler signal and the
X-co ready sensitive switch
invalid after finish loading
5706
SFXM action
failed
SFXM motor action

overtime
5708
SFXM action
failed
5801
Functional
control code
error
5802
Data length error
5803
Command label
error
5804
Check code error
FX_READY sensitive
switch error: should be
switched off, but is detected
to be switched on
Functional code not defined
in the communication
protocol
Data length differs from that
of the current command
label
Command label not defined
in the communication
protocol
The check code differs from
the calculated check code
5-115

Confirm the number of mixing times and
resend the correct command
Initialize the mix mechanism
Check the home position photocouplers of the
mix motors. and replace the photocoupler
when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler
error
Confirm the SFXM action status and resend
the command
1. Self-test if the SFXM home position
photocoupler is broken
2. When the photocoupler is working
properly, send a SFXM action command to
check if the SFXM motor is normal
1.
Remove the tube rack long Y-co, and

then resend the command
1.
Self-test if the SFXM end position

photocoupler is broken;
2. When the photocoupler is working
properly, send a action command to check
if the SFXM motor is normal
1. Check if both the SFXM end position and
home position photocouplers are blocked. If
not, it is the photocoupler at fault.
1 When there is a ready tube rack, if it is
determined that the X-co ready sensitive
switch does not function properly, then
replace the switch
2 When there is no tube racks, SFXM at
end position indicates a SFXM end
position photocoupler error. Replace the
photocoupler.
Check if the defined action time is reasonable
and the actual action speed of the motor meet
the requirement of the design
Sensitive switch error: replace the sensitive
switch after confirming the switch is broken
Communication error. Please resend

Hardware System
5805
5806
5817
End code error

Identity control
code error
Non-sequence
pack analysis
error
Not the end code defined in

the communication protocol
(016)
Identity code not defined in
the communication protocol
Unable to analyze the
non-sequence pack
5-116

Resend the correct command
Hardware System
5.5 Power board

5.5.1 Introduction
The power board provides six stable power supplies, including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V,
P12V and P24V.

Function
The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board
and module of the BC-5380: D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.
Block diagram
Figure 5-21 Block diagram of the power board
Description
The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz).
5-117
Hardware System
Once
the
AC
power
switch
is
turned
on,
all
the
circuits
work
and
the
D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted.

Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:
Table 5-84 Output voltage features
Voltage
Minimum
Nominal
Output voltage
Voltage
Load
current
current
range
adjustment
adjustment
rate
rate
Noise
D5V
2A
5A
4.85/5.25V
5%
100mV
+A12V
0mA
1A
11. 5/12. 5V
5%
100mV
-A12V
0mA
650mA
-11.5/-12.5V
5%
100mV
P12V
0.3A
5.5A
11.5/12.5V
5%
150mV
P24V
0A
4A
22/27V
10%
150mV
AC120V
0mA
60mA
115/145V(RMS)
10%
For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the
period of 60S may occur when working.
The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are
connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading
from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on
the power board is shown below.
5-118
Hardware System
Figure 5-22 Interface layout of the power board
See the following table for the function of each interface.

Table 5-85 Interfaces on the power board
Interface
J1
Function
AC input
Number of pins
Number of lands
Note
Power supply output

J2
of the fans
PCB
Power supply output
A-J12
of the analog part
soldering
6
output
PCB
soldering
A-J13
AC output
5-119
output
Hardware System
PCB
soldering
Power supply output

A-J35
of the power part
10
10
output
PCB
soldering
Power supply output

A-J37
of the digital part
output
Definition of J1:
Table 5-86 Definition of AC input interface
Pin
Definition
L, Live wire
PG, Earth wire
N, Neutral wire
Definition of J2:
Table 5-87 Definition of the fan interface
Pin
Definition
P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output
voltage
1/3/5
PGND, connects the negative end of the P12V

2/4/6
output voltage
Definition of AJ12:
Table 5-88 Definition of analog board output
Land
Definition
Pin
AGND, connects the reference

ground of the analog board output
TP16AGND\TP17AGND
TP15A12V
voltage
6,7
+A12V,connects the positive end of
the +A12V output voltage

-A12V,connects the negative end of
TP18A-12V
the -A12V output voltage
NC
8
1/2/3/4
Definition of AJ13:
5-120
Hardware System
Table 5-89 Definition of AC output
Land
Definition
Two
output
TP19\TP20
AC120
NC
ends
Pin
of
1/3
2
Definition of AJ35:
Table 5-90 Definition of power supply output
Land
Definition
positive end of the P12V
TP1P12V/TP2P12V
Pin
output voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P
negative end of the P12V
GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND
output voltage
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24
Positive end of the P24V
output voltage
4/5
6/7/8/9/10
1/2/3
Definition of AJ37:
Table 5-91 Definition of D5V output
Land
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
TP7DGND/TP8DGND
Definition
Pin
Positive end of the 5V output

voltage
1/2
DGND, negative end of the
3/4
5V output voltage
Assembly drawing
5-121
Hardware System
Figure 5-23 Assembly drawing of the power board

The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:
5-122
Hardware System
Table 5-92 Test points on the power board
No.
Pin
Function
Reference
value
Q101.2
Q101 switching waveform
Q101.1
Q101 drive waveform
C114.+
PFC output voltage
39020V
U101.9
Reference output voltage of the chip
7.5V
U101.14
U101 oscillating waveform
C206.+
VCC voltage
17V~22.5V
C204
VDD voltage
121V
C223
supply voltage of U201
121V
Q201.1
Q201 drive waveform
10
Q201.2
11
U201.8
U201 reference voltage
5V
12
U201.4
13
Q201.3
R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current
waveform
14
C232.+
D5V output voltage and ripple voltage
50.5V
15
C311.+
U301 supply voltage
121V
16
U301.4
17
U301.8
8V
18
Q303.1
Q303 drive waveform
19
Q303.2
20
Q303.3
Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage
waveform
21
C326.+
12VB voltage
120.5V
22
C328.+
130V DC output
115V150V
23
C332.+
A+12V output
120.5V
24
C338.-
A-12V output
-120.5V
25
U351.15
U351 supply voltage
120.5V
26
U351.5
27
U351.11
Q351 drive waveform
28
U351.14
Q351 drive waveform
29
U351.16
5V
30
Q361.1
Q361 drive waveform
31
Q362.1
Q362 drive waveform
32
Q363.1
Q363 drive waveform
33
Q364.1
Q364 drive waveform
34
C409.
U401 supply voltage
121V
5-123
Hardware System
35
U401.5
36
U401.14
5V
37
U401.9
Q401 drive waveform
38
Q406.1
Q406 drive waveform
39
Q406.2
40
C423.+
P24V output voltage, ripple
22~27V
41
C442.+
P12V output voltage, ripple
120.5V
5.5.4 Replacement and Connection
Purpose
Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools
Sharp-nose pliers
Multimeter
Disassembly
Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the
whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):
Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:

3. Remove the data boardsee section 5.2.4 for details
4. Remove the drive boardsee section 5.3.4 for details
5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the
cable fixer and remove the cables.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole.
(M4X8) fixing the power assembly.
8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors
connecting the power switch.
5-124
Hardware System
9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.
Figure 5-24 Removing the power assembly 1

1 ---Mother board
2 --- Power switch
3 --- Ground pole
4 --- Power assembly
5 --- Panhead screw M4X8
Further disassembly of the power assembly
(M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket
from the power assembly.
(M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket.
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug
from the power board, and then remove the fan.
(M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.
5-125
Hardware System
Figure 5-25 removing the power assembly 2

2 --- Power socket
4 ---Fan
5---M3 Nut
6---Power board
7 ---fixing board for power board
8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6
9---Power board shielding cover
10 ---Power cover
Assembly
Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the
conductive cover of the main unit.
2. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.
5-126
Hardware System
When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be
sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power
board.
Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the
main unit.
Causes and recommended action

Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.
5-127
Hardware System
Figure 5-26 Power board troubleshooting flow chart
Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.
5-128
Hardware System
5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board

5.6.1 Introduction
The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count.
Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are
processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming
and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for
the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred
to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal
transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.

Function
Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of
running.
Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure
chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.
Block diagram
Figure 5-27 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board
5-129
Hardware System
Description
WBC count start/end signals
The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred,
level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.
RBC/PLT count start/end signals
The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V
transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the
drive board.
Drive control the volumetric sensor
The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work;
when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.
Vacuum/pressure voltage signals
The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the
voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further
transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1
connector.
The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location
of the connector is shown below.
5-130
Hardware System
Figure 5-28 Interface layout of the volumetric board
Table 5-93 Pin definition

No.
Pin
Signal description
Signal Type
P+12V
+12V power supply
+12 power supply
PGND
Power ground
DGND
Digital ground
POSI_PRESS
Pressure voltage signals output
Analog
NEGA_PRESS
Vacuum voltage signals output
Analog
DGND
Digital ground
#VM_CTRL
Volumetric sensor control signals
TTL level
RBC_START
RBC count start signals
TTL level
RBC_STOP
RBC count stop signals
TTL level
10
WBC_START
WBC count start signals
TTL level
11
WBC_STOP
WBC count stop signals
TTL level
12
D+5V
Digital +5V power supply
+5V power supply
5-131
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-29 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top
Figure 5-30 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom

Purpose
The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board
needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board
replaced.
5-132
Hardware System
Tools
Sharp-nosed pliers
Disassembly
1. Shut down the analyzer;
2. Open the right door;
4. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube.
(M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing
the volumetric board.
6. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and
disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.
Figure 5-31 Disassembly of the volumetric board

1---volumetric tube bracket
3---Volumetric tube
4---Rubber ring
5---Socket cap screws (M3X16)
6---Shielding box of volumetric board
7---Volumetric board
5-133
Hardware System
Assembly
Verification
1.
The volumetric board is assembled properly.
2.
Start up the analyzer properly.
3.
Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and
abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.
Table 5-94 Troubleshooting the volumetric board
No.
Error
Error name
type
Error feature
Causes
Probability
Improper
with
the mother board

or disconnection
power
supply error
System
error
The voltage of
caused
the P+12V test
broken cable
point
Improper
is
equal
not
to
12V0.6V.
by
supply
main
Reconnect the
Medium
cable
or
change a new
cable
power
of
the
unit
or
Improper
power
sent
action
cable
connection
+12V
Recommended
+12V
See
troubleshooting
Low
supply
by
of
the
board
the
drive
and
power board
mother board
The voltage of
2
+5V
power
supply error
Board
error
the P+5V test

point
is
equal
5V0.25V.
not
to
L2 is damaged
(or rosin jointed)
or something is
wrong
(rosin
jointed) with the

C20 and C13.
5-134
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System
Improper
cable
connection
with
the mother board

or disconnection
caused
by
Reconnect the
Medium
cable
or
change a new
cable
broken cable
Something
is
wrong with the

Comparator
3
reference power
supply wrong
Board
error
The
TP6
output voltage
2.5V0.25V
+5V
power
Low
Something
is
wrong with the
Low
Improper
with
the mother board

or disconnection
4
error
error
Voltage of the
VM_CTRL
signal 0.8V
caused
by
Medium
Control
signals
through
Control
signal
error
Control
volumetric
sensor error
the
Board
error
change a new
Low
troubleshooting
of
the
drive
board
Medium
See No.4 in the

table
circuit
error (Q1 or U2 is
Standard
voltage (TP5)
2.5V0.25V
or
See
is wrong
of
cable
cable
the mother board
source
the
broken cable
board
re-solder
Reconnect the
sent by the drive
Constant current
or
cable
connection
System
Replace
U8
rosin jointed.
signal
table
supply.
U8 chip or it is
Control
See No.2 in the
wrong
or
rosin
jointed; resistors
R10, R11, R18,
R23,
R25
and
R24 is wrong or
rosin jointed)
5-135
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System
Adjust VWST,
VWSP,
VRST
and VRSP to
VWST,
VWSP,
VRST or VRSP
are not adjusted
make
Medium
well.
the
voltage of the
point WT, WP,
RT
and
RP
equals
Voltage
6
of
the
2.7V0.1V
Voltage of the
point WT, WP, RT
Board
point WT, WP,
and RP is not the
error
RT and RP
expected value
2.7V0.1V
to
respectively.
Volumetric
sensor U15, U21,
U16 or U17 is
Low
wrong (or rosin
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
jointed).
Constant current
source
of
the
volumetric
Medium
See No.5 in the

table
sensor error
+5V
power
supply error
Low
Indicators D1,
D2, D3 and D4
are off when
7
Indicator
Board
abnormal
error
fluid flows or
are
still
on
when no fluid
flows
through
Low
rosin jointed)
+5V
supply error
the
Low
See No.2 in the

table
is
wrong with the

TP6
change
or
component
power
Something
table
Re-solder
D1, D2, D3 or D4
is damaged (or
See No.2 in the
standard
Low
See No.3 in the

table
power supply
the volumetric
Voltage
tube
point WT, WP, RT

and
of
RP
the
Medium
See No.6 in the

table
2.7V0.1V
8
Constant current
Board
Standard
+12V
source error of
error
voltage TP10
supply error
5-136
power
Low
See No.1 in the

table
Hardware System
the
vacuum
2.5V0.25V
C14, R37, U11,
sensor
R47
or
U4
is
damaged
(or
Re-solder
Medium
or
change
the
component
rosin jointed).
+12V
Constant current
9
source error of
Board
the
error
pressure
sensor
power
supply error
Standard
voltage TP7
2.5V0.25V
Low
C21, R36, R35,

U3
or
U10
is
damaged
(or
See No.1 in the

table
Re-solder
Medium
or
change
the
component
rosin jointed).
+12V
Pressure/vacuum
10
unit
+2.5V
reference power
Board
error
supply error
power
supply error
Standard
voltage TP9
2.5V0.25V
Low
R39, C11, R38,

R48, VR9, U9 or
U6 is damaged
See No.1 in the

table
Re-solder
Medium
change
Adjust
is
not
adjusted well.
Pressure/vacuum
11
1.25V
voltage
error
The
the
component
(or rosin jointed)
VR9
or
VR9,
making
Medium
the
relative voltage
of the TP9 to
TP8
relative
1.2500.002V
Board
voltage of the
error
TP9 to the TP8
Pressure/vacuum
1.2500.002V
2.5V
power
reference
supply
Medium
See No.10 in
the table
error
U6 is damaged
or rosin jointed
12
Pressure
output
voltage abnormal
Board
When the input
+12V
error
pressure
is
supply error
0HPa
or
Constant current
the
source error of
450HPa,
output voltage
the
of the point PP
sensor
is not equal to
1.25V
1.2500.002V
error
5-137
power
pressure
voltage
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Low
Medium
Medium
See No.1 in the

table
See No.9 in the
table
See No.11 in
the table
Hardware System
or
Adjust PPZ to
2.2500.002V.
make
the
voltage of the
PP
is
1.2500.002V
when the input
PPZ or PPG is
not adjusted well
pressure is 0.
Medium
Then,
adjust
PPG to make
the voltage of
the
PP
is
1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure
is
450HPa.
U12, U14, R34,
R44, R45, R46,
R50, R52, C10 or
Re-solder
Medium
C23 is damaged
change
or
the
component
(or rosin jointed)

13
Vacuum
output
voltage abnormal
Board
When the input
+12V
error
pressure
is
supply error
0HPa
or
Constant current
the
source error of
-450HPa,
output voltage
the
of the point NP
sensor
is not equal to
1.25V
1.2500.002V
error
5-138
power
vacuum
voltage
Low
Medium
Medium
See No.1 in the

table
See No.8 in the
table
See No.11 in
the table
Hardware System
or
Adjust NPZ to
0.2500.002V.
make
the
voltage of the
NP
is
1.2500.002V
when the input
NPZ or NPG is
not adjusted well
pressure is 0.
Medium
Then,
adjust
NPG to make
the voltage of
the
NP
is
0.2500.002V
when the input
pressure
is
-450HPa.
U12, U13, R33,
R40, R41, R42,
R43, R51, C7 or
C22 is damaged
(or rosin jointed)
5-139
Re-solder
Medium
change
component
or
the
Hardware System
5.7 Liquid-level detecting board

5.7.1 Introduction
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH
and cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level
detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by
current-voltage
transferring,
level-transforming
and
de-bouncing.
Finally,
the
drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.

Function
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and
cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.
Block diagram
LEO
I
tube
LEO(I) Sensor
I-V
transform
Level transform
LEO
II
tube
LEO(II) Sensor
I-V
transform
Level transform
J1
LH tube
LH Sensor
I-V
transform
Level transform
CL tube
CL Sensor
I-V
transform
Level transform
Liquid Level Board

Figure 5-32 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board
5-140
Mother
Board
Hardware System
Description
For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle,
so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.
Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)
The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the
I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then
sent to the drive board.
Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents
The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work;
when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.
The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board.
The location of the connector is shown below.
J1
Figure 5-33 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board
The definition of pins is shown in the table below.
5-141
Hardware System
Table 5-95 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board
No.
Pin
Signal description
Signal Type
D+5V
Digital +5V power supply
+5V power supply
LIQ1
LEO(I) status output signals
TTL level
LIQ2
LEO(II) status output signals
TTL level
LIQ3
LH status output signals
TTL level
LIQ4
Cleanser status output signals
TTL level
#D_CTRL
Drive control signals of detecting sensor
TTL level
DGND
Digital ground
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-34 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top
Figure 5-35 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom
5-142
Hardware System
5.7.3 Replacement and Connection
Purpose
Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the
operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.
Tools
Disassembly
Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
Remove the board from the main unit:
1.
Shut down the analyzer.
2.
Open the left door.
3.
Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
4.
Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.
5.
(M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.
6.
Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its
back, and then remove the board.
5-143
Hardware System
Figure 5-36 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1

1---Cross-recessed
panhead
screw
2---Liquid-level
detecting
board
M3x6 (with washer)
cover
4---Liquid-level detecting board
shielding
Further disassembly of the drive board
1.
M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.
2.
Remove the 2 pipe clamps.
Figure 5-37 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2

1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8
2---Liquid-level detecting board
3---Pipe clamp
5-144
Hardware System
Assembly
Verification
1.
The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.
2.
The tubing is connected properly.
3.
Start up the analyzer properly. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If No LEO(I)
(/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser) or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.
Table 5-96 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board
No.
Error name
Error
Error
type
features
Causes
Probability
Improper
with
the mother board

disconnection
caused
action
cable
connection
or
Recommended
by
Reconnect
Medium
the
cable or change a
new cable
broken cable
The voltage
1
+5V power
System
supply error
error
of the +5V
test point is
not equal to
5V0.25V.
Improper
power
supply of the main

unit or Improper
+5V power supply
sent
by
See
Low
troubleshooting of
the
drive
board
and power board
the
mother board
L2 is damaged (or
rosin jointed) or
something
wrong
is
(rosin
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
jointed) with the

C7 and C11.
Comparator
2
reference
power
Board
error
The
TP1
output
voltage
Something
wrong
with
is
the
+5V power supply.

5-145
Low
See No.1 in the

table
Hardware System
supply
2.5V0.25V
wrong
Something
wrong
is
with
the
chip U9 or R10 or
they
are
Low
rosin
Replace
or
re-solder the U9
jointed.
Improper
cable
connection
with
the mother board
Control
System
signal error
error
Voltage
of
or
the
caused
disconnection
by
Reconnect
Medium
the
cable or change a
new cable
broken cable
D_CTRL
signal
Control
signals
See
sent by the drive
0.8V
board through the
Low
troubleshooting of
the drive board
mother board is
wrong
Control
signal
error
Abnormal
driving
4
of
the
detecting
Board
error
sensor
Voltage
to
Control
ground
of
error (Q1, U1, U2,
See No.3 in the

table
circuit
collector
U3
electrode of
wrong
Q1 is not
jointed;
between
R1, R2, R9, R40,
4.4V-5.25V.
R41, R42 or R43
or
Medium
U4
or
are
rosin
resistors
Medium
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
are wrong or rosin

jointed).
Adjust VL1, VL2,
The voltage
of
voltage
point
point VLL1,
VLL1,
5
of
Board
VVL2,
error
VVL3
and
VVL4 is not
VVL4
the
2.2V0.1V
VVL2,
VVL3
and
VL3 and VL4 to

VLL1,
make the voltage
VVL2,
VVL3 or VVL4 are
Medium
not adjusted well.
VVL2, VVL3 and

VVL4 equals to
2.2V0.1V
respectively.
expected
value.
of the point VVL1,
Detecting sensors
U1, U2, U3 or U4
are
wrong
rosin jointed).
5-146
(or
Low
Replace
or
re-solder
the
components
Hardware System
Abnormal driving
of the detecting
Medium
sensor
+5V power supply
error
LED1,
Low
LED2,
LED3 or LED4 are

damaged (or rosin
Indicator
Board
abnormal
error
Indicators
error
LED1,
Something
LED2,
wrong
with
and
TP1
LED4
are
power supply
the
standard
still
on
voltage of point
when
the
VLL1,
is
filled
with
See No.2 in the

table
Low
change
or
the
component
Low
See No.1 in the

table
is
LED3
tube
table
Re-solder
jointed)
+5V power supply
See No.4 in the
VVL2,
VVL3 and VVL4
Low
Medium
See No.2 in the

table
See No.5 in the

table
2.2V0.1V
fluid or are
U7,
off when no
R32, R17, R13,
fluid exists
R14, R18, R21,
in the tube.
R5,
R15,
R11,
R19,
R30,
R22, R12, R31,

R4,
R23,
R25,
R26, R27 or R28

are damaged (or
rosin jointed).
5-147
Re-solder
Medium
change
component
or
the
Hardware System
5.8 Laser Control Board

5.8.1 Introduction
The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.

Function
Power conditioning
Laser drive current monitoring
Constant-laser power controlling
Block diagram
Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the laser control board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 100mV.
Laser drive current monitoring
The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.
Constant-laser power controlling
The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output
5-148
Hardware System
power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a
closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The
power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.
The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser, as the figure shows.
Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the laser control board
Table 5-97 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)

PIN
1
Definition
AVSS
Note
-12V
Direction I/O
Analog
power
Level
-12V
No greater than 5V
supply
2
AGND
Analog ground
LASER
Monitoring
voltage
of
laser drive current

4
AVCC
12V Analog power supply
12V
#CONTROL
Control signals produced
I/O
Low level: 0.8V
by standard voltage
High level: OC door

of 5V
VCC
5V digital power supply
5-149
5V
Hardware System
Table 5-98 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)
No.
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O
1
LDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser diode
LDC
Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode
PDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board

Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the
voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat
VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test
point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases.
Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 3.9-4.1V (adjustable as per the situation; it is the voltage
difference relative to A-12V), then the voltage of TPILD is 0.8-2.0V (it is also the voltage
difference relative to A-12V; note: the laser works normally).
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.
5-150
Hardware System
Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power
supply is cut off.
Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.
See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-99Test points of the laser control board
No.
Test
Signal under
point
test
Function
A+12V
AVCC
The +12V power from the data board
A-12V
AVSS
The -12V power from the data board
D5V
VCC
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the

upper photocoupler.
Digital
4
AGND
ground
\
on
board
5
TPVREF
VREF
The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1 chip

(relative to A-12V).
Double
TP2VREF
2VREF
voltage
to
ground
of
the
rheostat
sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in

direct ratio.
The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21
TPIPD
PDA
caused by the feedback current signals from the

photoelectrical receiving part of the laser.
The working current signals of the diode part of the
laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode
TPILD
LASER
part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting

whether the laser is working under the expected
status.
5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly

See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.
5-151
Hardware System
Table 5-100 Troubleshooting the laser control board
No.
Error
Error
Features
Recommended action
Possible Causes
Improperly connected
Reconnect the cable or
or disconnected with
change a new cable
the mother board

Improper power sent
+12V
power
supply error
The voltage of
to the laser control
the A+12V test
board
point exceeds
the range of
12V0.6V
Check and make sure the

power sent by the mother
board and the data board
is proper.
Something is wrong
Check the circuit on the
with
board.
the
power
control circuit on the

board.
Grounding
short-circuits.
The
power is lower or
higher.
Something is wrong
-12V
power
supply error
The voltage of
with
the A-12V test
control circuit on the
point exceeds
board.
the range of
short-circuits.
-12V0.6V
power is lower or
the
power
Grounding
The
Check the circuit on the

board.
higher.
The voltage of
3
5V
power
supply error
the D5V test

point exceeds
the range of
5V0.25V
change a new cable
the mother board

Improper
power
is
sent
the
laser
power sent by the mother
control board by the
data board or mother
is proper.
to
board.
The voltage of
4
Control signal
the
error
#CONTROL
0.8V
signal
change a new cable
the mother board

Improper
control
signals sent by the
signals sent by the mother
data board or mother
board
are proper.
5-152
Hardware System
Reference
voltage error
The voltage of
First ensure the -12V
Re-solder or change the
TPVREF
power
U1
works
2.5V0.1V
normally. Then, the
(regards -12V
chip
as reference)
jointed or damaged.
U1
First
is
rosin
ensure
the
TPVREF is normal.
Then,
the
slide
is
rosin
Laser
The voltage of
rheostat
intensity
TP2VREF
jointed or damaged.
control
abnormal
reference
(should
voltage error
3.9V-4.1V)
is
Or,
be
something
wrong
components
is
with
the
soldering
of
the
operation
amplifier
U2
and
its
peripherals.
Laser
diode
damaged
or
Re-connect or change the

connection
cable,
connected improperly
change the laser diode
or
Laser
The voltage of
5V voltage error
See No.3 in the table
intensity
TPILD
Control signals error
See No.4 in the table and
monitoring
exceeds
or succeeding control
check
signals TPILD
range
circuit error
circuit.
output error
0.8-2V
the
of
The
operation
amplifier U3 and its
the
succeeding

components
peripherals are rosin

jointed or damaged
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.
5-153
Hardware System
5.9 Pre-amplification board

5.9.1 Introduction
The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered
lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and
amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal
share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.

Function
Power conditioning
Optical-electrical converting
Signal conditioning
Block diagram
Figure 5-41 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board
Description
Power conditioning
The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 50mV.
Optical-electrical converting
The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals
by the photodiode.
5-154
Hardware System
Signal conditioning
The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the
succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input
required signals are obtained.
The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e.
the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother
board). The layout of the board is shown below.
Figure 5-42 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board

PIN
Definition
Note
Direction
Level
I/O
1
AGND
Analog ground
FS/SS
Pre-amplification board output voltage signals
SHELL
Shielding ground
AVSS
A-12V analog power supply
-12V5%
AGND
Analog ground
AVCC
A+12V analog power supply
12V5%
1V
The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
5-155
Hardware System
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser.
Figure 5-43 Interface layout of the laser control board

PIN
Definition
Note
Direction I/O
Level
AVSS
-12V Analog power supply
-12V
AGND
Analog ground
LASER
Monitoring
5V
voltage
of
laser drive current

4
AVCC
12V Analog power supply
12V
#CONTRO
Control signals produced
I/O
Low level: 0.8V
by standard voltage
High level: OC
door of 5V
VCC
5V digital power supply
5V
Table 5-103 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)

No.
Name
Note
Direction I/O
Level
LDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser diode
LDC
Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode
PDA
Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver
5-156
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
(a) Top
(b) Bottom
Figure 5-44 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board
5-157
Hardware System

No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the
board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-104 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board
No.
Test
Signal under
point
test
Digital
AGND
Function
\
ground
on
board
2
+12V
AVCC
The +12V power from the data board
-12V
AVSS
The -12V power from the data board
OUT
OUT
FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals
D5V
VCC
The 5V power from the data board. It enables the

upper photocoupler.
5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly

See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.
Table 5-105 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board
No.
Error
Error Features
Possible Causes
Improper
The voltage of the
test
cable
connection
with the mother board or the
data board, or disconnection
change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
12V
+12V
point
Improper 12V power sent by
power
exceeds the range of
the data board or mother
supply
120.6V;
board
error
ripple
or
the
noise
greater than 50mV.
is
Recommended action
Rosin

power supply is sent by
the mother board or the
data board
joint
or
damage
happens to the +12V test

point relating inductor L1 or
the capacitors C24, C27, C20
and C23.
5-158

component
Hardware System
Improper
The voltage of the
cable
connection
with the mother board or the
data board, or disconnection
change a new cable
caused by a broken cable
-12V
-12V
point
Improper -12V power sent by
power
exceeds the range of
the data board or mother
supply
-120.6V;
board
error
ripple
test
or
the
noise
is
greater than 50mV.
Rosin

power supply is sent by
the mother board or the
data board
joint
or
damage
happens to the -12V test point

relating inductor L2 or the
capacitors C22, C26, C25 and

component
C21.
SS
output
signals
too weak (supposing

it is caused only by
the circuit problems)
output
value
error
the location of the SS board
R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,
rosin jointed or damaged
component
The SS board is installed in
too
strong
the location of the FS board
(supposing
it
by mistake.
output
is
Change the board
by mistake.
signals
FS
Channel
The FS board is installed in
Change the board
caused only by the
R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,
circuit problems)
rosin jointed or damaged
component
The
The photodiode D1 or R1 is
rosin jointed or damaged.
component
output signals are
The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed
too
or damaged.
component
pre-amplification
board
(FF/SS)
weak
to
be
detected.
Something is wrong
with the band width
of
pre-amplification
board (FF/SS).
the
Check whether the relating

resistors and capacitors R4,
R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are
component
rosin jointed or damaged.
5-159
Hardware System
5.10 Indicator Board

5.10.1
Introduction
The indicator board realizes the functions of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.
5.10.2
Board Composition
Function
Analyzer working status indicating
Buzzer alarming
Description
Analyzer working status indicating
The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When
the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator
turns red.
Buzzer alarming
The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-106 Interface definition of the indicator board
PIN
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O
VCC
Power supply
+5V
FAULT
Error indicator (red)
TTL
WORK
TTL
BUZ
Buzzer
TTL
GND
Ground
Working
indicator
(green)
5-160
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-45 Assembly drawing of the indicator board
5.10.3
Disassembly and assembly method
Purpose
Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools
Disassembly
2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the
indicator board, and then remove the board.
5-161
Hardware System
Figure 5-46 Disassemble the indicator board and the key board
1---Key board
2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)
3---Front cover
4--- Indicator board
Assembly
Assemble the indicator board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the
process from startup self-test to ready, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they
work normally, the replacement is successful.
5.10.4
Troubleshooting
Table 5-107 Troubleshooting the indicator board
No.
1
Error
Indicator doesn't work
Causes and recommended action

If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking
the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused
by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection and the system works normally, then, the
diode of the indicator might be damaged.
The buzzer is mute when
If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking
system alarming.
the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused

by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a
hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged.
5-162
Hardware System
5.11 Key Board

5.11.1
Introduction
The key board enables the operator to interact with the main unit through the [RUN] and
[OPEN] keys during the autoloading/manual loading process.
5.11.2
Board Composition
Function
[RUN] key
[OPEN] key
Description
Use the [RUN] key
The operator can press the [RUN] key to start autoloading.
Use the [OPEN] key
The operator can press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment door.
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-108 Interface definition of the key board
PIN
Name
Note
Direction
Level
I/O
COUNT_KEY
[RUN] key
TTL
INSERT_KEY
[OPEN] key
TTL
GND
Ground
5-163
Hardware System
Assembly drawing
Figure 5-47 Assembly drawing of the key board
5.11.3
Disassembly and assembly method
Purpose
Damaged key board needs to be replaced by a new one.
Tools
Disassembly
2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 tapping screws (PT3X8) fixing the
key board, and then remove the board.
5-164
Hardware System
Figure 5-48 Disassemble the key board and the indicator board
1---Key board
3---Front cover
4--- Indicator board
Assembly
Assemble the key board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the key board. Wait for the PC
interface to show ready, and then press the [OPEN] key in the front cover. If the sample
compartment door opens, then the key board is successfully replaced.
5.11.4
Troubleshooting
As the structure of the key board is quite simple, it seldom has errors. If there is no response
after pressing the keys, connect the 2 and 4 pins, as well as the 3 and 4 pins of the J1 interface.
If the circuit is closed after pressing one of the keys, the key board is out of error and you
should check other components for errors; if the circuit is open, the key is not working properly.
5-165
Maintenance
6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding

Settings
No.
Type
Settings to be reset
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
by software
Replace the drive board
1
2
Maintenance
Replace the autoloader board

Boards
Replace the data board

Replace the power board
4
5
Replace the volumetric board

Mechanism
Remove the sample feeding

assembly from the analyzer and
then re-assemble it
6
Remove the sample compartment
assembly from the analyzer and
then re-assemble it
7
8
Disassemble and assemble the

sample feeding assembly
DIFF bath assembly or have it
upgraded
9
10
11
Remove the DIFF bath assembly

from the analyzer and then
re-assemble it
Remove the mix assembly from
the
analyzer
and
then
re-assemble it
clipper or have it upgraded
12
13
14

mix assembly
Replace
and
disassemble/assemble the front
cover
6-1
Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software

Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
count-related settings
Re-conduct the safety test
Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
sample feeding assembly
to the sample compartment and the autoloading
position by software.
1. Manually adjust the position of the sample
compartment on the sample feeding assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
assembly to the sample compartment by
software.
Re-assemble the sample feeding assembly as
per the steps specified in Section 6.8
assembly to the DIFF bath.
2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
necessary.
to the DIFF bath by software
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
mix assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
software.
1. Locate the clipper to the right position by
clamp.
software.
Re-assemble the mix assembly as per the
specified process.
mix assembly.
software.
Maintenance
Replace
disassemble/assemble
bottom cover
and
the
15
Replace the aperture
16
17
Replace the bath

Baths
Replace the volumetric tube
18
19
20
21
Sequence
Replace HGB
The vacuum created in the
sequence is changed
Sample results are changed
greatly
6-2

sample feeding assembly.
assembly to the sample compartment and the
autoloading position by software.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at
the setting screen.
Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.
Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.
Maintenance
6.2 General
You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.3 6.7 . After repairing, follow the verification
procedures to verify the analyzers status.
6-3
Maintenance
6.3 Disassembling the Panels

6.3.1 Removing the left door
Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the left door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord
2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock
tongue 90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
Figure 6-1 Removing the left door
Installation
Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.
6-4
Maintenance
6.3.2 Removing the right door

Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the right door.
Tools
Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue
90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.
Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door;
otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.
Figure 6-2 Removing the right door
6-5
Maintenance
Installation
Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.3 Removing the top cover

Purpose
To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure
to remove the top cover.
Tools
Removal
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws.
3. Pull out the top cover from back upward.
6-6
Maintenance
Figure 6-3 Removing top cover

1 M4X8 small panhead screw
2 top cover
Installation
Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.4 Removing the back panel

Purpose
To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the back panel.
Tools
6-7
Maintenance
Removal
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws
used for fixing the back panel of power supply
3. Pull the back panel outward.
Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply

2 back panel of power supply
Installation
Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6.3.5 Removing the front door

Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system inside the front cover, follow this procedure to remove the front
door.
Tools
6-8
Maintenance
Removal
2. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.3 .
3. Turn the handspike handle 90 (clockwise and counterclockwise) to make it slide into the
slot in the front board, and the front door will be pushed open by the handspike.
4. Lift the front door upwards.
Figure 6-5 Removing the front door

1 Handspike handle
2 Handspike
3 Back panel
4 Mix mechanism
5 Front panel
6 Front door
6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly

Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system, syringes and sample transport unit inside the front cover, follow
this procedure to remove the front cover.
Tools
6-9
Maintenance
Removal
2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 .
3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.2 .
4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 .
5. Make sure there are no tubes or tube racks left at the sample transport area (if there are,
remove them).
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws
on the left, right and top side of the front cover.
7. Pull the front cover outward by 50 - 80 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from
the indicator board.
8. Remove the front cover forward.
Figure 6-6 Removing the front cover assembly

2 top cover
3 Key board
4 indicator light board
5 right door
6 M4X8 countersunk head screw
7 front cover assembly
8 left door
Installation
Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
6-10
Maintenance
6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes

(Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)
Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the left door

1 valve assembly I
2 M4X12 small panhead screws
3 plain washer 3
4 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw

(with lock washer)
5 diluent syringe
6 lyse syringe
8 pressure chamber
9 air pump
10valve assembly II
6-11
Maintenance
Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the right door

1 valve
4 vacuum chamber
5 waste pump assembly
6 valve assembly III
7 pinch valve
6-12
Maintenance
Figure 6-9 Removing fluidic system inside the front door

1 valve
2 pressure-leakage valve
4 sheath syringe
5 injection syringe
6 sampling syringe
7 plain washer 3

(with lock washer)
6.4.1 Replacing valves

Purpose
In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.
To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)
6-13
Maintenance
1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly..
5. Take out valve assembly.
To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)
1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
the valve on the right side, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ); to remove the
valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section 6.3.2 )
2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9 (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding
tube).
fastening the valve assembly.
4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the
valve out.
Figure 6-10 Valve assembly I
6-14
Maintenance
Figure 6-11 Valve assembly II
Figure 6-12 Valve assembly III

1 valve
3 valve bracket
Installation
Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check the fluidic connections.
2. Power on and verify the installation.
6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber

Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.
6-15
Maintenance
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.
To remove the pressure chamber:
1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws.
4. Pull the pressure chamber out.
To disassemble the pressure chamber:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate;
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap,
then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
Figure 6-13 Removing pressure chamber

1M3X12 cross-headed panhead
2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)

3 O ring 48.7x1.8
4 O ring 9.5 x 1.8
5 airproof screw
6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber
6-16
Maintenance
Installation
Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.
2. Check the fluidic connections..
6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber

Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.
Tools
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.
To remove the vacuum chamber:
1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 )

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws.
4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.
To disassemble the vacuum chamber:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate.
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end
cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).
6-17
Maintenance
Figure 6-14 Removing vacuum chamber

1M3X12
cross-headed
panhead
2 end cap
screw (with lock washer)

3 O ring (48.7x1.8)
4 O ring (9.5x1.8)
5 airproof screw
6 mounting plate
7 air pressure chamber
Installation
Install the vacuum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
2. Check the reagent connections.
6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly

Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.
Tools
2 mm hexagon wrench
6-18
Maintenance
2.5 mm hexagon wrench
150 mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.
To remove the syringe assembly
1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 );
to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front
cover assembly (as per section 6.3.5 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-9.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws
fixing syringe and 3 plain washer. .
4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the
motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber
washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)
To disassemble the syringe:
1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syringe
a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the
assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul
and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 ).
c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed
screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass
syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe (as per Figure 6-15).
Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the
glue is dry.
6-19
Maintenance
Figure 6-15 Removing glass syringe unit

1 M4X8 special screw
2 glass syringe unit
3 washer
d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on
the electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to
remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch
(Figure 6-16).
6-20
Maintenance
Figure 6-16 Removing syringe assembly

1MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM
Linear
2 syringe slider
rolling guide
3 M3X8 socket head screw
4 43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor
5 M3X6 cross-headed panhead
6 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor
screw
7 syringe photocoupler bracket
9 Syringe protection shield
10 M4X8 retaining screw
e. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the syringe protection shield. Use
2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe slider.
Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and remove
the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head
screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor (Figure
6-21
Maintenance
6-16);
Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and
apply some glue to the threads.
f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear
rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off
its guide way.)
2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being
the 10ml Mindray syringe.)
a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per
section 6.3.1 )
b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover
assembly (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 )
c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver and flat-headed screwdriver to remove the 10ml syringe presser the two
tailor-made M3X12 socket head screws, and remove the Mindray syringe unit. (Figure
6-17)
Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 10ml syringe presser
2 M3X12 socket head screw
3 Mindray syringe unit
4 M4X8 tailor-made screws
6-22
Maintenance
d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The
ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction.
(Figure 6-18)
Figure 6-18 Removing Mindray syringe unit

1 10ml ceramic plug
PT3X10
cross-headed
panhead
screw
3 10ml syringe flange
4 10ml syringe lock ring
5 O ring 15X3
6 10ml syringe body
Before replacing the lock ring, make sure relative parts (especially the
operation surface of the ceramic plug) are clean, and then insert the plug
into the flange, lock ring and O ring in turn and make it fixed to the syringe
body.
Installation
Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
2. Check wire connections.
3. Check reagent connections.
6-23
Maintenance
6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump

Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.
Tools
100 mm monkey wrench
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.
To remove the waste pump:
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump;
4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump;
on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.
To disassemble the waste pump:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the pump.
2. Remove the waste pump
3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers.
4. Remove the pump mounting plate.
5. Remove three shock pads via hand.
6-24
Maintenance
Figure 6-19 Removing waste pump

2 rotary pump
3 pump mounting plate
4 8-32UNC-2B nut
5 GB93 4 washer
6 shock pad
7 bracket
Installation
Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump.
3. Check the reagent connections.
6-25
Maintenance
6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly

Purpose
In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding
assembly.
Tools
Removal
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ).
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer
screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover.
6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs
to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring,
until the wire is drawn to the bath.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath
shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-21)
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on
bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-21)
9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the
bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the WBC bath
assembly or the RBC bath assembly.
6-26
Maintenance
Figure 6-20 Removing signal lines of bath

1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead
2 top cover of data board shielding box
washer screw
3 data board
Figure 6-21 Removing bath assembly

1 shielding plate
2 WBC bath
3 bath presser
5 RBC bath
6 shield cover
7 isolation chamber clamp
8 isolation chamber
6-27
Maintenance
Installation
Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Verification
1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not.
6-28
Maintenance
6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting

Position
6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe
Purpose
To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)
Replace parts according to requirements:
Probe wipe
open vial sample probe / piercing needle
metal wipe clip
sample probe presser
Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer if it is running.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.
Removal
1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-22)
a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe.

b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the
figure below, and remove the wipe clip.
c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow

d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.
6-29
Maintenance
Figure 6-22 Removing wipe

1 pipe clamp
2 presser under the guiding rod
3 probe wipe
4 wipe clip
2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-23)
a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe.
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small
panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.
c. Get out the probe from sideward.
6-30
Maintenance
Figure 6-23 Removing sample probe

1 slider
2 sample probe
3 presser
When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under
guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise
caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.
Installation
To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse
order.
6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor

Purpose
To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.
6-31
Maintenance
Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver107X75
Sensor module on motor position3003-21-34925

Photocoupler fixer
Preparation
Removal
1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-24)
a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure).
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor.
c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.
Figure 6-24 Removing vertical optical sensor

1 M3x6 cross-headed screw
2 sensor module on motor position
3 bracket
2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-25)
a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler
6-32
Maintenance
presser to be replaced
b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position)
from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the
corresponding hole.
c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler
presser and the sensor module on motor position.
d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module.
Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.
Figure 6-25 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position
Installation
To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.
6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module

Purpose
To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.
Tools
wire cutter
Sampling module
6-33
Maintenance
Preparation
3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as
possible.
4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 )
5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.
Removal
1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire
cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module.
2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the
connector from the motor directly.
3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left
by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5380 has four connectors, and
BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly.
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing
the joint.
5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing
the sampling module.
6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module
from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line.
7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding
holes, then hold out the sampling module.
6-34
Maintenance
Figure 6-26 Removing the sampling module

2 link
3 spacer
4 sampling module
Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If

necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to
avoid potential biologic pollution.
6-35
Maintenance
Installation
To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.
6-36
Maintenance
6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction

Bath
Purpose
To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.
Tools
wire cutter
DIFF reaction bath
Preparation
3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
Removal
1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the
DIFF bath assembly.
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing
the DIFF bath assembly.
3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe
connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them.
4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.
6-37
Maintenance
Figure 6-27 Removing DIFF bath assembly

1 DIFF bath assembly
Installation
To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.
Remember to readjust the position of the sample probe over the DIFF bath as per Step 11 to
14 in Section 6.10.1 .
6-38
Maintenance
6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)

6.8.1 Removing
and
replacing
the
closed-tube
sample
compartment assembly
Purpose
To remove or replace the closed-tube sample compartment, follow steps in this section.
Tools
1.5mm hexagonal wrench
sharp-nose pliers or small flat-headed screwdriver
Damp gear
PHOTOELEC switch
Gear
Electromagnet
Preparation
3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )
Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.
To remove the sample compartment assembly:
1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )

2. Unplug the connector of the photoelectric switch on the sample compartment assembly
and the cable connector of the electromagnet.
3. Mark the position of the sample compartment assembly on the autoloader board (make
sure the sample compartment assembly can be installed back to the right position).
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 3 M4X8 small panhead screws, and
then move out the closed-tube sample compartment assembly in the direction as indicated
by the arrowhead in Figure 6-28.
6-39
Maintenance
Figure 6-28 Removing the sample compartment assembly

1 Autoloader
2 Sample compartment assembly
To disassembly the closed-tube sample compartment assembly:
1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws, and then remove the electromagnet assembly; remove the two M3X6
cross-headed panhead screws in the electromagnet assembly, and then remove the
electromagnet body; remove the E ring to take out the spring, as shown in Figure 6-29
6-40
Maintenance
Figure 6-29 Removing the electromagnet assembly

2 Electromagnet assembly
3 E ring
4 Spring
6 Electromagnet body
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screw fixing the photocouplers, and then remove the photocouplers, as shown in Figure
6-30
Figure 6-30 Removing the photocouplers

1 PHOTOELEC switch
6-41
Maintenance
3. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X5 set screws, and then remove
the gear; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws fixing the damp gear, and then remove the damp gear, as shown in
Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Removing the gear and the damp gear

1 M3X5 set screw
2 Gear
3 Damp gear
4. Use the sharp-nose pliers to remove the spring from either of the two fixing ends, as
shown in Figure 6-32.
5. Use the sharp-nose pliers or the small flat-headed screwdriver to remove either of the two
D2 E rings on the shaft, and loosen the two M3X5 set screws in the tube holder
compartment fixing the shaft. Then take out the shaft and remove the tube holder
compartment body and the helical torsion springs.
During installation, make sure the M3X5 set screws are fixed in the same
level of the notches in the shaft, and one of the screws should be plunged
into the cone-shaped hole.
6-42
Maintenance
Figure 6-32 Removing the helical torsion springs

1 D2 E ring
2 Shaft
3 M3X5 set screw
4 Tube holder compartment
5 Pulling spring
6 Helical torsion springs
6. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X5 set screw fixing the shaft, and then
you can take out the shaft, deep groove ball bearing, wheel, bush and gasket in turn, as
During installation, the two bearings should be put into the wheel (the
bearings are supposed to be cling to the inner of the wheel) until their ends
reaches those of the wheel; the set screws should be fixed in the level of the
notches in the shaft.
6-43
Maintenance
Figure 6-33 Disassembling the shaft assembly

1 Shaft
2 3x6x2.5 deep groove ball bearing
3 Wheel
4 Bush
5 Gasket
6 M3X5 set screw
Installation
To replace the sample compartment assembly with a new one, repeat the first removal
procedure (step 1 to 4) in the reverse order. During installation, take into account the
following items:
1. One side of the sample compartment assembly should be set close to the positioning step
raised on the bottom board (autoloader bottom board)
2. Be sure to install the assembly back to the position marked in disassembly.
To replace components like the photocouplers, electromagnet, damp gear or springs,

repeat the second procedure above in the reverse order. During installation, take into
account the following items:
1. The tube holder compartment body should be put right in the center
2. Always install the damp gear after the gear is installed
3. Turn the core of the electromagnet 360 and make sure there is no interference
4. Move the guiding axis of the electromagnet with you hand and make sure the sample
compartment can turn properly. Push the compartment body back to the initial position and
make sure it can be locked up.
6-44
Maintenance
6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the

sample transport unit
Purpose
To remove or replace the detection switches (detecting the sample transport unit for proper
loading of tube rack and empty/full status of the unloader), follow the steps in this section.
Tools
Sensitive switch
PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
Preparation
Removal
2. Unplug the cable connector corresponding to the switch to be replaced
3. Use the 101 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M2X8 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sensitive switch detecting the proper loading of tube racks, and then
remove the sensitive switch.
During installation, remember to check the orientation of the sensitive

switch and make necessary adjustment. To make adjustment, move the tube
rack manually to where the switch locates until it cannot be moved any
more; the clicking sound made by the sensitive switch indicates proper
installation (move the tube rack repeatedly to identify).
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M2X8 small panhead screws fixing
the switches detecting the empty/full status of the unloader, and then remove the switch,
as shown in Figure 6-34.
6-45
Maintenance
Install the switch as level as possible.
Figure 6-34 Disassembling the switches of the sample transport assembly

2 PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
4 Sensitive switch
Installation
To replace the switch with a new one, repeat Step 1 to 4 above in the reverse order.
6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit

Purpose
As there may be errors with the sample transport unit (especially the switches and driving
units) during operation, you need to replace these components according to the steps in this
section.
Tools

6-46
Maintenance
3mm hexagonal wrench
Preparation
Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the sample transport unit.
Remove the sample transport unit:

2. Remove the shielding box from the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the sample transport assembly and the autoloader control board
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sample transport unit, and then remove the sample transport unit, as
Note: You should readjust the position of the sample transport unit during installation. See
Chapter 3 for how to make adjustment.
6-47
Maintenance
Figure 6-35 Disassembling the sample transport unit (1)

1 Sample transport unit
Disassemble the sample transport assembly:
1. See Figure 6-36 for components of the sample transport compartment
6-48
Maintenance

1 Loading unit (forth-and-back)
2 Sample transport frame
3 Closed-tube sample compartment assembly
4 Riser unit
5 Unloader unit
6 Platform unit
7 Loading unit (left-and-right)
8 Backboard
2. Unplug the connector of the stationary barcode scanner; use the 107 screwdriver to
unscrew the four M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the stationary barcode scanner and
its bracket on the backboard unit, and then remove the stationary barcode scanner and its
bracket, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove other units on the backboard like the
tube detecting photocouplers and the tube rack locating plate as per Figure 6-37
During installation, make sure the back of the tube locating block and that of
the tube rack locating plate are at the same plane; adjust the distance
between the tube rack block and the tube rack to be around 0.2mm.
6-49
Maintenance

1 Stationary barcode scanner
2 Barcode scanner bracket
3 Backboard bracket
4 Sensor fixing board
6 Tube rack locating plate
7 Rubber baffle plate
8 Rubber baffle plate presser
10PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)
11Tube locating block

fixing the unloader unit and remove the connector of the photoelectric sensor on the
unloader unit, and then remove the unloader unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the unloader unit as per Figure 6-38
6-50
Maintenance

3 GP1A05A photoelectric sensor
4 Unloader pulling spring
5 Sensory plate
6 Top cover of the gear holder
7 Gear shaft
8 Short rack
9 Gear holder
10Long rack
11Bottom cover of the gear holder
12M3X8 cross-headed countersunk screw
13Unloader bracket
fixing the spring presser, and then remove the spring presser, as shown in Figure 6-36 and
Figure 6-39
6-51
Maintenance

1 Riser unit
2 Large plain washer GB96 3
3 Spring presser
5 Shaft sleeve
6 Sensory plate 3
fixing the front supporting board, and then remove the front supporting board, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40
8. Unplug the connectors of the sensitive switch and the PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective) on
the platform unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M3X8 small
panhead screws fixing the platform unit, and then remove the platform unit, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40
6-52
Maintenance

2 Sample transport platform
4 Front supporting board
9. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the three photoelectric sensor in the
left-and-right loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
left-and-right loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-41
10. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench and the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver to remove the left-and-right loading unit as per Figure 6-41
6-53
Maintenance

1 Stepping motor PK244M-01B
2 M3X5 hexagon set screw
3 Washer
4 Driven belt shaft
5 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4
6 E ring GB/T896-86.4
7 Guiding rail supporting block
8 Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A
9 Guiding rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM
10M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
11Belt presser
12Left-and-right loading slid plate
14Shaft sleeve
15M3X12
16Pallet
cross-headed
panhead
screw (with washer)

17Plain washer GB97.1 3
18M4X10 cross-head panhead screw
19Synchronous belt
20M3X8 small panhead screw
21Left-and-right loader bracket
22Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4
11. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the two photoelectric sensor in the
forth-and-back loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
forth-and-back loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-42
12. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench, 101 cross-headed
screwdriver and the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the forth-and-back loading
unit as per Figure 6-42
6-54
Maintenance

1 Driven belt shaft
2 Washer
3 Synchronous belt TBN160MXL025
4 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4
5 Stepping motor PK244M-01B
7 Large plain washer GB96 3
8 Right pusher
9 M3X5 hexagon countersunk head
10Belt presser
set screw
12Pulling spring
14Shaft sleeve 2
screw (with washer)

15Left pusher
16Forth-and-back loading pusher board
17Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A
18M3X8 small panhead screw
20Guiding rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM
screw
22Forth-and-back loader bracket
23E ring GB/T896-86.4
24Synchronous belt TBN160MXL02

(two positioning plate)
6-55
Maintenance
Installation
Repeat the removal steps in the reverse order to install.
Take into account the following items during installation and adjustment:
Requirements for installing the forth-and-back loading unit:
Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.
Requirements for installing the left-and-right loading unit:
Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.
Requirements for installing the unloader unit:
Make sure the two racks can move freely with little resistance after installation. If the resistance
is large, repair is necessary; otherwise, the unit may not be able to restore the initial position.
See the initial positions of the short rack in Figure 6-43 with one tooth hanging over the end.
Figure 6-43 Initial position of the short rack
Requirements for installing the sample transport unit:
While installing the assembled sample transport unit to the main unit, readjust tbe sample
proble position as per Step 1 to 10 in Section 6.10.1
6-56
Maintenance
Verification
1. Readjust the position of the sample probe as per Step 10 to 14 in Section 6.10.1 .
2. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
3. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
4.
Power on and verify the installation.
6-57
Maintenance
6.9 Mix mechanism

Purpose
As there may be errors with the mix mechanism during operation, you need to replace the
mix mechanism according to the steps in this section.
Tools
3mm hexagonal wrench
BC-5380 mix mechanism
Preparation
Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the mix mechanism.
Remove the mix mechanism:
1. Remove the shielding box on the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the mix mechanism and the autoloader control board
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 panhead screws, and
then remove the mix mechanism, as shown in Figure 6-44.
6-58
Maintenance
Figure 6-44 Removing the mix mechanism

1 Mix mechanism
Disassemble the mix mechanism:
1. Unfasten the plastic cable tie fixing the components and pull out the plugs from the five
photocouplers and three motors to the cable, and then remove the cable
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the small motor protection cover, and then remove the cover, as shown in
Figure 6-45
3. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the three M3X8 cheese head hexagon
screws connecting the rotation and X-co motion unit and the Z-co motion unit, and then
remove the two units, as shown in Figure 6-45
6-59
Maintenance
Figure 6-45 Disassembling the mix mechanism

1 Rotation and X-co motion unit
2 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw
3 Small motor protection cover
4M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
5 Z-co motion unit

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the protection cover, and then remove the protection cover, as shown in
6-60
Maintenance
Figure 6-46
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the two photocouplers on the 43 motor installation board, and then remove
the motor installation board and the elements on the board (draw out the motor shaft from
the motor nut), as shown in Figure 6-46
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the motor nut, and then remove the nut, as shown in Figure 6-46
7. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the connection block, and then remove the block, as shown in Figure 6-46
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the Z-co sensory plate, and then remove the two Z-co photocoupler sensory
plates, as shown in Figure 6-46
9. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the five M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail, as
shown in Figure 6-46
10. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling
6-61
Maintenance
1 Protection cover
2 Photocouplers
4Connecting block
5 Motor nut
6 Z-co sensory plate
7 Linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM
8 Bracket
11 43 motor installation board
12 Sensor installation bracket
screws fixing the sensor installation bracket, as shown in Figure 6-47
12. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X8 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear stepping motor E43H4Q, and then remove the linear stepping motor
E43H4Q, four M3 large washer and 8 O rings, as shown in Figure 6-47

1 Linear stepping motor E43H4Q
2 O ring

screw
5 Sensor installation bracket
6 M3 large washer
8 Sleeve
13. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the six M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, and
then remove the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, as
14. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor, and then remove the stepping motor E28H41, as
15. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 cheese head hexagon fixing
the 28 motor installation board, and then remove the installation board, as shown in Figure
6-48
6-62
Maintenance
16. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the connecting board, and then remove the connecting board
17. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R75Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling

1 Linear motor E28H41
4M2.5X6
cross-headed
panhead
screw
5 Slider connecting board
linear
guiding
rail
MGN9C1R75Z0CM
7 Connecting board
10 X-co sensory plate
11 Photocouplers
12 X-co sensor installation board
19. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the presser,
6-63
Maintenance
and then remove the presser, as shown in Figure 6-49
20. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the rotation
photocoupler plate, and then remove the rotation photocoupler plate, as shown in Figure
6-49
21. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the swing
arm and use the 2mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M4X8 set screw fixing the swing
arm, and then remove the swing arm
screws fixing the spring tube pincher, and them remove the M3 large washer and the
spring tube pincher, as shown in Figure 6-49
23. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X10 cheese head hexagon
screws fixing the rotation stepping motor, and then remove the four M3 large washer, the
rotation stepping motor and the synchronous belt, as shown in Figure 6-49
24. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four set screws fixing the two small
pulleys, and then remove the pulleys, as shown in Figure 6-49
25. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 screws fixing the bearing
holder, and then remove the bearing holder, pulley shaft and the two deep groove ball
bearings, as shown in Figure 6-49
26. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor E28H41 nut, and then remove the linear stepping
motor E28H41 nut, as shown in Figure 6-49
27. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
fixing the rotation sensor bracket, and then remove the rotation sensor bracket and the
photocouplers
6-64
Maintenance
1 Presser
2 Spring tube pincher
3 Rubber washer
5 Swing arm
6 M4X8 set screw
7 M3X5 set screw
8 Small pulley
9 Pulley shaft
10 Rotation motor installation board
11
Rotation
sensor
bracket
and
12 Bearing holder
photocouplers
13 Deep groove ball bearing
14 Rotation sensory plate
15 Rotation stepping motor
16 Linear stepping motor E28H41 nut
18 M3 large washer
20 Synchronous belt
Installation
Perform the steps above in the reverse order to install.
During installation or position adjustment, take into consideration the following items:
1. Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before
installation
2. Make sure the motion parts can move properly
3. Keep the synchronous belt fully tightened
4. Adjust the initial position of the pincher (for forth-and-back movement, left-and-right
movement, and rotation) while installing the assembled unit to the main unit. See Section
6.10.2 for how to make adjustment.
6-65
Maintenance
6.10 Adjustment
6.10.1
Adjusting Sample Probe Position
1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and open the sample compartment manually. Put the
sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample compartment and close the
compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-50. Loosen the three screws on the sample
transport unit shown in Figure 6-51, Figure 6-52 and Figure 6-53. Move the sample probe
assembly and sample transport unit horizontally and enable the sample probe to aim at the
central hole in the locating fixture, and then fix the three screws.
Figure 6-50 Sample transport unit
Figure 6-51 Left screw
Figure 6-52 middle screw
Figure 6-53 Right screw
2. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the PC software on the main unit and on the PC. Then, enter the user name
service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the
pop-up box, and then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message
box will pop up asking you whether to Ignore fluidic initialization?. Click Yes to skip
the initialization.
3. Press the [OPEN] key on the front cover, and the sample compartment will be opened
automatically. Put the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample
compartment, as shown in Figure 6-54.
6-66
Maintenance
Figure 6-54 Placing the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture

4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen, as shown in Figure
6-55.
Figure 6-55 Clicking Debug

5. Click CT Piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move to the
position above the sample compartment automatically, as shown in Figure 6-56.
6-67
Maintenance
Click Start
Figure 6-56 Starting CT piercing position adjustment

6. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the position of the sample probe,
making the probe inserted into the slot, and then click Up to move out the probe, as
6-68
Maintenance
Click Stop
Click Forward,
Backward,
Up and Down
Figure 6-57 Adjusting the CT piercing position using the software

7. Put a piece of paper on the locating fixture and click Down to make the sample probe
touch the paper. Then click Stop to save the position of the probe over the sample
compartment. Open the sample compartment manually to remove the sample
in-compartment locating fixture and close the compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-58.
Figure 6-58 Placing a piece of paper on the fixture

8. Put the sample probe autoloading locating fixture at the autoloading position of the sample
6-69
Maintenance
transport assembly, as shown in Figure 6-59
Figure 6-59 Placing the locating fixture at the piercing position

9. Click AL piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move onto the
autoloading position, as shown in Figure 6-60
Click Start
Figure 6-60 Starting AL piercing position adjustment

10. Click Forward, Backward, Down and Up to adjust the position of the sample probe,
6-70
Maintenance
making the probe inserted into the slot of the locating fixture. Click Up and put a paper on
the AL positioning fixture, and then click Down until the sample probe reaches the paper,
as shown in Figure 6-61. Click Stop to save the autoloading position of the sample probe,
and then remove the sample probe AL positioning fixture, as shown in Figure 6-62.
Click Stop
Click Forward,
Backward,
Down and Up
Figure 6-61 Adjusting the sample probe AL piercing position using the software
Figure 6-62 Sample probe reaching the paper

11. Put the sample probe DIFF bath up position locating fixture in the aperture of the DIFF
6-71
Maintenance
bath, as shown in Figure 6-63.
Figure 6-63 Placing the DIFF bath up position locating fixture

12. Click DIFF Bath Up Position, and then click Start to move the sample probe onto the
DIFF bath, as shown in Figure 6-64.
Click Start
Figure 6-64 Starting DIFF bath position adjustment

13. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the sample probe, making it
inserts in the position in front of the round slot. Click Stop to save the position of the
sample probe, and then remove the fixture, as shown in Figure 6-65.
6-72
Maintenance
Click Forward,
Backward, Up
and Down
Click Stop
Click Ok
Figure 6-65 Adjusting the sample probe DIFF bath up position using the software
14. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen.
6.10.2
Adjusting Pincher Position
1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and put the tube rack at the piercing position of the
sample transport unit, making the recess of the tube rack lap over the presser, as shown in
Figure 6-66, Figure 6-67 and Figure 6-68.
Recess
Figure 6-66 The recess of the tube rack
6-73
Maintenance
Presser
Figure 6-67 The presser of the sample transport unit
The presser laps over the

recess of the tube rack
Figure 6-68 Placing the tube rack

2. Move the pincher to the tube grabbing position and push upwards. Then put the tube
locating fixture into the pincher and make the pincher upright. Move the pincher
downwards slowly, and check if the tube locating fixture can be inserted to the tube rack
properly. If not, remove the four set screws and the left-and-right mixing assembly to insert
the tube locating fixture to the tube rack. Secure the screws after adjustment, as shown in
Figure 6-69.
Four screws
Tube locating
fixture
Figure 6-69 Adjusting the manipulator position manually

3. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the main unit and the PC software. Then, enter the user name service and the
6-74
Maintenance
password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the pop-up box, and
then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message box will pop up
asking you whether to skip the initialization. Click Yes to skip the initialization
4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen
5. Click Manipulator and Start in turn, and the pincher will move onto the tube grabbing
position, as shown in Figure 6-70.
Click Start
Figure 6-70 Starting manipulator position adjustment

6. Put the tube rack at the piercing position of the sample transport unit, and then put the
tube locating fixture into the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-71
Figure 6-71 Placing the pincher locating fixture

7. Click Left and Right to adjust the pincher to be upright, and then click Forward,
6-75
Maintenance
Backward, Up and Down to make the tube locating fixture able to insert in the hole of
the AL piercing position locating fixture. Click Up and remove the two fixtures, as shown
in Figure 6-72 and Figure 6-73.
Click
Left,
Right Forward,
Backward, Up
and Down
Click Stop
Click Ok
Figure 6-72 Adjusting the pincher position using the software
Figure 6-73 The hole in the piercing position locating fixture

8. Click Stop to save the position of the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-72.
9. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen, as shown in Figure 6-72.
6-76
Optical System
7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting

Purpose
To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.
Tools
Antistatic gloves
Hexagon wrench
Cross-headed screwdriver
Flat-headed screwdriver
Horologic driver
Duke (4K-07) 7m standard particles
Oscilloscope or oscillometer
Removal and installation

Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover
of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as
Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component
installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be
repeated in the following procedures.
7-1
Optical System
Screws
Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system
7-2
Optical System
7.2 Removing
and
Installing
Optical
System
Assemblies
The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell
assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly,
and rear light detector assembly.
Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.
Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before
removing boards.
Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is

disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.
7.2.1 Laser driver board

The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of
the laser.
1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver
board.
2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support.
3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing
screws.
7-3
Optical System
Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation

1fixing screws of laser driver board
2fixing screws of laser driver board
support
7.2.2 Front light assembly

The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install
the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing.
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater,
temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light
assembly and remove the assembly.
4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing
the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then
remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.
7-4
Optical System
Figure 7-3 Front light assembly

1Laser assembly
3Cylindrical mirror assembly
2Front guide assembly

5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly
or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of
the over temperature protection switch.
7.2.3 Flow cell assembly

The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle
tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to
create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and
disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the
outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take
out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.
7-5
Optical System
Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube

1Sample charging tube
2Sheath charing tube
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell
assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows.
4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.
Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure

1Rectifier assembly
3Detecting assembly
2O ring
4Hexagon screw
5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.
7-6
Optical System
7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly

The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and
allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light
collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of
the rear light collimator assembly.
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to
remove the lens assembly.
Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly

1Diaphragm lens assembly
2Rear light guide assembly
4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form
a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm
lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly

The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low
angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for
the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter
3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed
7-7
Optical System
screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the
boards.
4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.
5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of
the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.
Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly

1Base of spectroscope
4Clamping ring
2Side board
5Washer
3Top board
6Beam-splitting prism
7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly

The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered
light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a
LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.
LAS assembly

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and
remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle
diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the
two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.
7-8
Optical System
Figure 7-8 LAS assembly

1Low angle diaphragm
2Rear light focus lens assembly
4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as
needed.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
MAS assembly

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then
remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and
then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws
on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.
Figure 7-9 MAS assembly

1High angle diaphragm
2Rear light focus lens assembly
7-9
Optical System
4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.
7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly

The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical
signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a
forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Forward low angle PD assembly

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly
and then remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and
remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly

1Shielding box
3PD
2Low angle pre-amplification board
4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the
forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Forward middle low angle PD assembly

2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD
7-10
Optical System
assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then
remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.
Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly

1Shielding box
3PD
2High angle pre-amplification board
4PD cover
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install
the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.
Pre-amplification board

2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and
remove the shielding box from the PD assembly.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD
assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly.
Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the
replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.
7-11
Optical System
7.3 Adjustment
Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been
disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly
has been disassembled.
The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse
adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same
optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine
tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the
signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the
signal generated meets the adjustment standard.
7.3.1 Coarse adjustment

According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light
assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light
collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.
Front light assembly adjustment
Purpose:
Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far
field spot is in the vertical direction.
Principle:
The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the
incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at
the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the
optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the
optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser
assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator
assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the
surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly
turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as
Figure 7-13 shows.
7-12
Optical System
Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation
Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment
7-13
Optical System
Flow cell adjustment
Purpose:
Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.
Principle:
That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers
the incident light when the light enters vertically.
Procedure:
Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the
optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell
surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to
harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.
Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment
Rear light collimator assembly adjustment

Rear light horizontal position adjustment
Purpose:
To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.
Principle:
The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting
direction.
Procedure:
1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes
through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical.
Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.
7-14
Optical System
Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly
2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the
beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center
of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light
collimator assembly.
Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator
assembly is finished
The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.
Rear light collection assembly adjustment

LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
7-15
Optical System
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly
diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Procedure:
1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly
diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical
horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17).
2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in
Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm

MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
Purpose:
To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS
assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is
finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure
the fixing screw.
Rear light detector assembly adjustment

Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment
Purpose:
To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.
Procedure:
7-16
Optical System
Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the
center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the
aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly

1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
2Low angle beam spot
veiling glare
Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment
Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward
low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by
the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
veiling glare
The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above,
each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following
describes the fine tuning of the optical system.
7-17
Optical System
7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning
Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell

Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the
optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square
aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path,
as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment

1Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob
Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light

After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct
light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is
the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the
diaphragm is right in this position.
Visual check method:
Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two
sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in
Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot
distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.
7-18
Optical System
Figure 7-21 Visual check method
1Beam spot
3Drawing line
2Inner aperture of the flow cell
4High angle diaphragm
DC background method:
Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or
the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and
select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC
background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.
After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in
Figure 7-22).
Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light

1Lock screw of the diaphragm
against direct light
7.3.3 Fine tuning

The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it
detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly
consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that
the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered
7-19
Optical System
light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the
forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the
rear light collimator assembly.
Before the particle adjustment, at the Main Menu Setup Gain screen, set the
values of SS and FS to be 100.
Adjustment of front light assembly axial position
Purpose:
Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.
Procedure:
1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the
voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the
voltage is 4V.
2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD
assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,
time 500ns/div and AC coupling.
3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7m standard
particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the
centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.
4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the
oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown
in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is
obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as
shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.
7-20
Optical System
Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position

1Front light axial adjustment knob
2laser axial adjustment lock screws
Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system
Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and
generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance
until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of
the guide assembly support is about 4mm.
Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly
Purpose:
To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed
collection angles.
7-21
Optical System
Procedure:
1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD
assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the
oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div
and AC coupling.
2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the
rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.
Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach
the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.
3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv10mv. If not,
adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the
CH1 are 190mv10mv.
4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the
adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal
peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.
Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position
Purpose:
To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.
Procedure:
1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the
oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.
2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the
oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.
7-22
Optical System
Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position

1Horizontal adjusting knob of the
flow cell
3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure
7-26:
Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams

Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the default screen is
the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click Calculate to obtain the particle scattergram
parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following
standards:
MAS 0.1max width < 15.21
LAS 0.1max width < 6.5
4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the
flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the
optical system.
7-23
Optical System
Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell

1Lock screws of the flow cell
Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.
7.3.4 Gain setup

After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup
consists of two steps:
Calibration using calibrators

At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the calibrator
in the CT-WB-CBC+DIFF mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit, please
clean the flow cell or do a background check).
After the test, Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the
default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click Calculate to obtain the
calibrator scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.
7-24
Optical System
Figure 7-28 Optical system output calibrator signal

Enter into the Peak target boxes:
LAS low angle gravity center target
MAS high angle gravity center target
Calculate
the
gains,
enter
the
gains
into
the
corresponding
boxes
of
the
MainSetupGain screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.
After the gain setup, retest the calibrator and 7m standard particles to verify the gain and
check if the following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of
the calibrator should be within 0.57 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 0.63
from the target. For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92);
low angel width 6.50; high angel width 15.21. Otherwise, continue calibrating until the
following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be within 1.51 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 2.4 from the target.
For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator should be
18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angel
width 6.50; high angel width 15.21.
Sample verification
After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood
samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images
shown in Figure 7-29:
7-25
Optical System
Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample

If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different
from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic
system work normally.
7-26
Optical System
7.4 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation
The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram
is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn
smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell
position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.
Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram
Settlement:
Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the
laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of
front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the
peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment
screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller,
then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment
screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of
standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.
7.4.2 Flow cell clog

This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes
the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as
Figure 7-31 shows.
7-27
Optical System
Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram

Settlement:
Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.
7.4.3 Dirty flow cell

It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to
the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the
inner wall of flow cell.
Settlement:
Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in
the same direction
Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.
7-28
Troubleshooting
8.1 Error code and information

Table 8-1 Error code and information
Error Code
Error Name
Error Code
Error Name
0x01000100
Valve output failed
0x01003011
High pressure
0x01000101
Valve No. out of range
0x01003020
WBC volumetric tube filter

clog
0x01000201
Sampling assembly horizontal
0x01003021
motor failed to move to target
RBC volumetric tube filter

clog
position
0x01000202
0x01003030
motor failed to return to home
DIFF reaction bath temp.

error
position after initialization

0x01000203
0x01003031
motor failed to leave home
Temperature out of working

range
position after initialization

0x01000204
Adjusting sampling assembly

horizontal
motor
to
0x01003032
target
Temperature out of operating

range
position failed
0x01000205

horizontal
motor
to
0x01003033
Optical system temp. error
0x01003050
FS blank voltage abnormal
0x01003060
HGB blank voltage abnormal
0x01003061
Laser diode current abnormal
0x01003062
HGB channel error
0x01003070
Diluent expired
home
position failed
0x01000206

horizontal
motor
to
leave
home position failed

0x01000207

motor adjustment error
0x01000208

motor adjusting steps out of
limit
0x01000209

motor adjusting end position
error
0x01000211
Sampling assembly vertical
8-1
Troubleshooting
motor failed to move to target
position
0x01000212
0x01003071
HGB Lyse expired
0x01003072
LEO(I) Lyse expired
0x01003073
LEO(II) Lyse expired
0x01003074
Cleanser expired
0x01003080
No Diluent
0x01003081
No LH lyse
0x01003082
No LEO(I) lyse
0x01003083
No LEO(II) lyse
motor failed to initialize to

upper position
0x01000213

motor failed to initialize to
lower position
0x01000214

vertical
motor
to
target
position failed
0x01000215

vertical
motor
to
upper
position failed
0x01000216

vertical motor to leave upper
position failed
0x01000217

motor adjustment error
0x01000218

motor adjusting steps out of
limit
0x01000219

motor adjusting end position
error
0x01000220
Sampling assembly is working
0x01003084
No Cleanser
0x01000221
Cannot
sampling
0x01003085
Waste is full
0x01003090
Emptying WBC bath failed
0x01003091
Emptying RBC bath failed
0x010030A0
Constant current source 55V
adjust
assembly
0x01000222
motor action overtime

0x01000223

motor action forbidden
0x01000224

motor does not match current
voltage abnormal
position
0x01000225
0x010030A1
motor action overtime

0x01000226
+12V
analogue
voltage
abnormal
0x010030A2
motor action forbidden
-12V
analogue
abnormal
8-2
voltage
Troubleshooting
0x01000227

motor
mismatch
0x010030A3
current
Drive
board
24V
voltage
12V
voltage
5V
voltage
abnormal
position
0x01000228
0x010030A4
motor failed to pierce to lower
Drive
board
abnormal
position
0x01000229
0x010030A5
motor failed to pierce to upper
Drive
board
abnormal
position
0x01000230
0x010030B0
Data board DDR abnormal
0x010030B1
Data
motor photocoupler error

0x01000231
Sampling assembly RBC bath

photocoupler error
0x01000232
Sampling
board
FLEXBUS
abnormal
assembly
WBC
0x010030B2
Data board FLASH abnormal
Sampling assembly DIFF bath
0x010030B3
Data
bath photocoupler error

0x01000233
photocoupler error.
0x01000234
Sample
assembly
Sampling
vertical
0x010030B4
assembly
Sampling
Data
board
AD7928
abnormal
upper
0x010030C0
photocoupler error
0x01000236
AD7908
abnormal
motor photocoupler error

0x01000235
board
Drive board communication

error
assembly
lower
0x010030D0
Side door open
0x010030D1
Optical assembly cover open
0x010030D2
Sample compartment door
photocoupler error
0x01000300
Sampling syringe busy
0x01000301
Sampling
syringe
photocoupler abnormal
0x01000302
open
Sampling syringe failed to
0x01004200
Software protocol resolution
0x01004201
Response overtime
0x01004202
Heartbeat disconnected
0x01004401
DIFF data FIFO overflow
0x01004402
DIFF data RAM overflow
return to home position after

action
0x01000303

leave
home
position
after
action
0x01000304

return to home position before
action
0x01000305

leave home position before
action
0x01000306
Sample
syringe
aspirate
8-3
Troubleshooting
volume over range
0x01000307
Sample
syringe
dispense
0x01004403
WBC data FIFO overflow
action
0x01004404
WBC data RAM overflow
0x01000310
Sample injection syringe busy
0x01004405
RBC data FIFO overflow
0x01000311
Sample
0x01004406
RBC data RAM overflow
0x01004407
PLT data FIFO overflow
0x01004408
PLT data RAM overflow
0x01004409
HGB data FIFO overflow
0x0100440a
HGB data RAM overflow
0x01004600
Analyzer
volume over range

0x01000308
Sample
syringe
overtime
injection
syringe
0x01000312
Sample
failed
injection
to
return
syringe
to
home
position after action

0x01000313
Sample
injection
syringe
failed to leave home position

after action
0x01000314
Sample
failed
injection
to
return
syringe
to
home
position before action

0x01000315
Sample
injection
syringe

before action
0x01000316
Sample
injection
syringe
aspirate volume over range

0x01000317
Sample
injection
disconnected
syringe
0x01004601
dispense volume over range

0x01000318
Sample
injection
communication
Analyzer
network
configuration fail
syringe
0x01005200
Loading motor busy
action overtime
0x01000320
Sheath fluid syringe busy
0x01005201
Manipulator pinch motor busy
0x01000321
Sheath
0x01005202
Manipulator
fluid
syringe
0x01000322
0x01000323
pinch
motor
Sheath fluid syringe failed to
0x01005203
Manipulator
pinch
motor
return to home position after
failed to return to home
action
position

leave
home
position
0x01005204
after
Manipulator
pinch
motor
action forbidden
action
0x01000324
0x01005205
return to home position before
Manipulator
pinch
motor
initialization failed
action
0x01000325
0x01005206
8-4
Manipulator
pinch
motor
Troubleshooting
leave home position before
action overtime
action
0x01000326
Sheath fluid syringe aspirate
0x01005207
volume out of range

0x01000327
Sheath fluid syringe dispense
0x01005208
motor
Manipulator
pinch
motor
failed to return to end position
Sheath fluid syringe action
0x01005400
overtime
0x01000330
pinch
failed to leave end position
volume out of range

0x01000328
Manipulator
Manipulator
pinch
motor
initialization forbidden
Lyse syringe busy
0x01005401
Manipulator elevation motor

busy
0x01000331
Lyse
syringe
photocoupler
0x01005402
abnormal
0x01000332

Lyse syringe failed to return to
0x01005403
home position after action

failed to return to home
position
0x01000333
Lyse syringe failed to leave
0x01005404

0x01000334
action forbidden
Lyse syringe failed to return to
0x01005405
home position before action

0x01000335
Lyse syringe failed to leave
0x01005406
Lyse syringe aspirate volume
0x01005407

failed to leave end position
Lyse syringe dispense volume
0x01005408
out of range
0x01000338

action overtime
out of range
0x01000337

initialization failed

0x01000336

failed to return to end position
Lyse syringe action overtime
0x01005500

forbid mix motor action
0x01000340
Diluent syringe busy
0x01005501
Mix motor busy
0x01000341
Diluent syringe photocoupler
0x01005502
Mix motor failed to leave
abnormal
0x01000342
home position
Diluent syringe failed to return
0x01005503
to home position after action

0x01000343
Mix motor failed to return to

home position
Diluent syringe failed to leave
0x01005504
Mix motor action forbidden
0x01005505
Mix motor initialization failed
0x01005506
Mix motor action overtime
0x01005507
Mix motor failed to leave end

0x01000344
Diluent syringe failed to return

to home position before action
0x01000345
Diluent syringe failed to leave

0x01000346
Diluent
syringe
aspirate
8-5
Troubleshooting
volume out of range
0x01000347
Diluent
syringe
position
dispense
0x01005508
volume out of range

0x01000348
Diluent
syringe
Mix motor failed to return to

home position
action
0x01005600
overtime
Action forbidden when the

mix motor is not at home
position
0x01000401
Optical system setting out of
0x01005601
Mix mechanism busy
0x01005602
Mix mechanism initialization
limit
0x01000402
DIFF bath temperature setting

out of limit
0x01000601
failed
Setting pressure failed
0x01005603
Mix
mechanism
action
overtime
0x01000602
Setting vacuum setting failed
0x01005604
Mix time setting out of limit
0x01000603
Adjusting pressure chamber
0x01005605
Mix mechanism initialization
pressure failed
0x01000604
failed
Adjusting vacuum chamber
0x01005606
vacuum failed
Mix
mechanism
current
action forbidden
0x01000605
Pressure test failed
0x01005700
Feeding motor busy
0x01000606
Vacuum test failed
0x01005701
Feeding motor initial position

photocoupler error
0x01000607
Pressure chamber pressure
0x01005702
out of control limit

0x01000608
error
Vacuum chamber vacuum out
0x01005703
of control limit
0x01000611
Feeding position tube rack

Feeding motor end position
photocoupler error
Flow cell clog
0x01005704
Feeding motor photocoupler

error
0x01000701
Driver board FPGA download
0x01005705
Feeding motor loading error
0x01005706
Feeding
symbol error
0x01000702
Driver board FPGA download

command error
0x01000703
Driver
board
motor
action
overtime
FPGA
load
0x01005708
Feeding position switch error
Drive board single data written
0x01005801
Autoloader board functional
address out of range

0x01000704
out of limit
0x01000705
code error
Drive board data write out of
0x01005802
limit
0x01000706
Autoloader board data length

error
Drive board write forbidden
0x01005803
Autoloader board command

label error
0x01000707
Drive
board
FPGA
write
0x01005804
8-6
Autoloader board check code
Troubleshooting
overtime
0x01000731
error
Drive board EEPROM write
0x01005805
error
0x01000801
error
Drive board functional code
0x01005806
error
0x01000802
Autoloader board end code

Autoloader
board
identity
board
FPGA
code error
Drive board data length error
0x01005820
Autoloader
download symbol error

0x01000803
Drive board command label
0x01005821
error
0x01000804
Autoloader
board
FPGA
download command error
Drive board check code error
0x01005822
Autoloader board FPGA load

address out of range
0x01000805
Drive board end code error
0x01005823
Autoloader board single data

write out of limit
0x01000806
Drive board identity code error
0x01005824
Autoloader board data write

out of limit
0x01000807
Sequence pack analysis busy
0x01005825
Autoloader
board
write
board
write
forbidden
0x01000808
No complete sequence pack
0x01005826
Autoloader
overtime
0x01000809
Sequence pack head frame
0x01005900
error
0x01000810
Sequence pack start analysis
0x01005901
receive
Loading motor initialization

forbidden
Sequence pack total frames
0x01005902
error
0x01000812
motor
command error
number error
0x01000811
Loading
Unloading tray full, unloading

forbidden
Sequence pack save error
0x01005903
Loading motor initial position

photocoupler error
0x01000813
Sequence pack end frame
0x01005904
error
0x01000814
Sequence pack body frame
0x01005905
Sequence pack frame order

Sequence
unloading
Unloading
position
right
photocoupler error
0x01005906
error
0x01000816
motor
position photocoupler error
error
0x01000815
Loading
Unloading
position
left
photocoupler error
pack
execution
0x01005907
Loading motor not initialized
None-sequence pack analysis
0x01005908
Loading motor feeding not at
overtime
0x01000817
error
0x01002000
Background abnormal
initial position
0x01005909
Loading motor unloading not

at initial position
8-7
Troubleshooting
0x01002010
WBC count starts too slow
0x0100590A
Loading
motor
action
overtime
0x01002011
WBC count time too long
0x0100590B
Autoloader receive command

error(not in sampling mode)
0x01002020
WBC count starts too fast
0x0100590C
Autoloader receive command

error(not in stop status)
0x01002021
WBC count time too short
0x0100590D
Autoloader horizontal loading

photocoupler match error
0x01002022
WBC bubbles
0x0100590E
Autoloader unloading tubes

out of limit when initialization
0x01002030
RBC count starts slow
0x0100590F
Photocoupler blocked after

autoloader initialization
0x01002031
RBC count time too long
0x01005a00
Autoloader board EEPROM

chip error
0x01002040
RBC count starts too fast
0x01005a01
Opening
sample
compartment door failed

0x01002041
RBC count time too short
0x01005a02
Autoloader action forbidden

when autoloader is paused
0x01002042
RBC bubbles
0x01005a03
Autoloader adjust forbidden

when autoloader is not at
adjusting status
0x01003000
Low vacuum
0x01005a04
Autoloader
parameter
adjustment
setting
range
0x01003001
High vacuum
0x01003010
Low pressure
0x01005a05
8-8
Scanner read error
out
of
Troubleshooting
8.2 Errors indicated by error messages

When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be
displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are
discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the
lowest.
Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You
can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error,
or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.
8.2.1 Pressure errors

Table 8-2 Pressure errors
Error Message
Description
Setting pressure failed
The pressure created in
Pressure pump abnormal
the specified time can
Tubing connects the pressure chamber
not
or pressure pump leaks
meet
Possible causes
the
requirement.
Pressure filter leaks

Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal
Setting vacuum setting
The vacuum created in
Vacuum pump abnormal
failed
the specified time can
Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or
not
vacuum pump leaks
meet
the
requirement.
Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate

error
Related detecting circuit abnormal
8.2.2 Reagent errors

Table 8-3 Reagent errors
Error Message
No Diluent
No LH lyse
Description
Possible causes
Diluent is used up or the
The Diluent is used up.
sensor of the diluent
The sensor of the diluent pick up tube is
pick
connected improperly or damaged and
up
tube
is
connected improperly.
needs to be replaced.
LH lyse is used up or
The LH lyse is used up.
excessive bubbles exist
LH
in the LH lyse channel
excessive bubbles.
8-9
lyse
channel
leaks,
leading
to
Troubleshooting
No LEO(I) lyse
LEO(I) lyse is used up or
The LEO(I) lyse is used up.
LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to
in
excessive bubbles.
the
LEO(I)
lyse
channel
No LEO(II) lyse
LEO(II) lyse is used up
The LEO(II) lyse is used up.
or
LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to
excessive
bubbles
exist in the LEO(II) lyse
excessive bubbles.
channel
No Cleanser
Waste is full
Cleanser is used up or
The cleanser is used up.
Cleanser
in the Cleanser channel
excessive bubbles.
The waste container is
Waste container is full.
full
sensor
The sensor of the waste pick up tube is
waste
connected improperly or damaged and
or
connecting
the
the
container is connected
channel
leaks,
leading
to
needs to be replaced.
improperly
Diluent expired
LEO(I) Lyse Expired
LH Lyse expired
Cleanser expired
Diluent expired
Diluent expired
Exp. date setting is wrong
LEO(I) lyse expired
LEO(I) Lyse expired

LEO(II) lyse expired

LH lyse expired
LH Lyse expired
Cleanser expired
Cleanser expired
8.2.3 Hardware errors

Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.
8.2.4 Measurement errors

Table 8-4 Measurement errors
Error Message
Description
Possible causes
Background
One or more background
1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or
abnormal
results are out of the

specified range
aperture are contaminated.

2. Diluent is expired or contaminated
3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing
leak, leading to excessive bubbles
8-10
Troubleshooting
4. Bubbles or clog is alarmed during the
background count.
5. Outside interference caused by poor
shielding
LAS
background
voltage abnormal
Value is out of the range

of 0-400mv
1. LAS voltage signal is improperly

inducted.
2. Flow cell is contaminated.
3. Related detecting circuit abnormal
HGB
background
voltage abnormal
HGB background voltage

is
out
of
the
range
[3.2,4.9]V
1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath;

HGB light is not turned on.
2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated.
3. Reagent is expired or contaminated.
4. Improper HGB gain settings
5. HGB light assembly abnormal
6. Related detecting circuit abnormal
RBC clog
RBC count time too long

RBC starts too slow
1. Improper settings for reference count

time and start time.
2. The bath is contaminated or the
aperture is clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
6. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.
RBC bubbles
RBC count time too short

RBC starts too fast

tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
WBC clog
WBC count time too long

WBC starts too slow

2. The bath is contaminated or the
8-11
Troubleshooting
aperture is clogged by impurity.
tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
WBC bubbles
WBC count time too short

WBC starts too fast

tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
8.2.5 Temperature errors

Table 8-5 Temperature errors
Error Message
Description
Possible causes
Optical system temp.
Temperature value read
The temperature transducer inner the
error
is out of the range of [30,
optical system error
40] .
The heater inner the optical system error
Reaction bath abnormal
The bath temperature is out of the
or
bath
reference range of 35-37. Please
transducer
adjust the temperature to meet the
DIFF
reaction
bath
temp. error
reaction
temperature
error
requirement.
The temperature transducer of reaction
bath is damaged and needs to be
replaced.
Ambient
temperature
out of working range
Ambient
abnormal
temperature
temperature
or
The ambient temperature is out of the
ambient
working range of 15-30. Please
transducer
error
requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
8-12
Troubleshooting
Ambient
temperature
out of operating range
Ambient
temperature
abnormal
or
temperature
The ambient temperature is out of the
ambient
operating range of 10-40. Please
transducer
error
requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
8.2.6 Scattergram errors

Table 8-6 Scattergram errors
Error Message
Description
Possible causes
Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential
Fuzzy division between

Fuzzy
between
division
MON
and
NEU
MON and NEU occur on

normal samples, which
leads to abnormal or no
MON differential result.
reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be

1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
Flow cell is dirty.
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
normal
range.
The
reaction
is
not
thoroughly processed.
For normal samples, the
DIFF
scattergram
differentiates but fuzzy

LYM too high
division occur between

LYM and Ghost, which
leads to abnormal or no
LYM differential result.
Spots
obtained
from
Spots scatter all over
normal patient samples
the scattergram
are randomly scattered

all over the scattergram.
RBCs are not thoroughly hemolyzed.

Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential
reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be
1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
normal
range.
The
reaction
is
not
thoroughly processed.
Sheath flow is not formed. Excessive
bubbles enter the WBC channel. Check
whether the diluent container is empty to
make sure if something is wrong with the
diluent sensor.
Calculate the gain of the analyzer
For
Compressed
scattergram
normal
patient
according to the standard scattergram. If
the
the newly set gain is normal and the
samples,
scattergrams obtained is
scattergram
compressed
without the compressed problem, then no
either
evenly or to one side.
differentiates
properly
further adjustment is necessary.

If the gain setup cannot solve the
8-13
Troubleshooting
problem, refer to the optical system
section in the service manual to remove
the error.
8-14
Appendixes
A. Accessories
A.1
No.
Spare parts and assemblies

Code/Model
Name
3001-30-68501
Data Board
3101-30-68503
Drive Board
3101-30-68505
Mother Board
3101-30-68507
Liquid Detection Board
3101-30-68509
Power Supply Board
3101-30-68511
Volumetric Board
3101-30-68513
Laser Control Board
3101-30-68515
FS Pre-amplify Board
3101-30-68517
SS Pre-Amplify Board
10
3101-30-68519
Indicator Board
11
3102-30-69199
Autoloader board
12
0033-30-74615
10ml syringe
13
3100-10-49438
100ul syringe
14
3101-10-69301
250ul syringe
15
M90-100032---
2.5ml syringe
16
3003-20-34942
2-way valve(Asco)
17
3003-20-34941
3-way valve(Asco)
18
3101-30-68611
Release Valve Assembly
19
M07-00014S-00
Pinch Valve Assembly
20
3101-30-68351
Waste Pump Assembly
21
3001-10-07252
Waste Pump
22
530B-10-05275
Pressure Pump
23
3001-10-07057
Volumetric Tube
24
3100-30-40745
tube rack assembly
25
3101-30-68320
Diff Bath Assembly
26
3102-30-69230
HGB assembly
27
3102-30-69253
WBC bath assembly

A-1
Appendixes
28
3102-30-69223
RBC bath assembly
29
3003-20-53969
RBC Ruby (D70nm)
30
3003-20-53970
WBC Ruby (D100nm)
31
3102-20-69171
Sampling probe
32
3101-30-68756
Diluent Cap Assembly
33
3101-30-68765
LEO (I) Lyse Cap Assembly
34
3101-30-68766
LEO (II) Lyse Cap Assembly
35
3101-30-68767
LH Lyse Cap Assembly
36
3101-30-68768
Cleanser Cap Assembly
37
3101-30-68776
Waste Cap Assembly
38
3006-20-74804
Probe Wipe
39
3003-20-34949
Isolation Chamber
40
3102-20-69165
Pressure Chamber
41
3101-30-68547
Vacuum Chamber
42
3001-10-07054
Air filter
43
2800-21-28878
Syringe Motor Position Sensor Assembly
44
3003-21-34925
Sampling Motor Position Sensor Assembly
45
0030-10-13064
Syringe Motor (100ul 250ul 2.5ml 10ml)
46
BA30-10-15115
Sampling motor
47
0000-10-11272
motor 2.33V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly
48
0000-10-11271
motor 2.1V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly
49
3102-30-69231
autoloader assembly
50
3101-30-68651
Optical System Assembly
51
3100-30-49556
Front Laser Assembly
52
3100-30-49559
Back Laser Assembly
53
3100-30-49560
Splitter Assembly
54
3101-30-68662
Las Stop Assembly
55
3101-30-68663
Mas Stop Assembly
56
3101-30-68664
Las PD Assembly
57
3101-30-68665
Mas PD Assembly
58
3100-30-49568
Flow Cell Assembly
59
3100-10-49436
7um particle (15ml)
60
M90-100031---
Tubing, PTFE, 0.066"X0.098"
61
M90-000026---
Tubing, PTFE,1/32"X1/16", 3000074
62
M90-000025---
Tubing, 1/8"X1/4",R-3603AAC02007, Tygon

A-2
Appendixes
63
M6G-020011---
Tubing, PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID
64
M6G-020009---
Tubing, 0.031"ID0.156"OD
65
M6G-020007---
Tubing, OD3mm ID1mm EVA
66
M6G-020006---
Tubing, Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350
67
A21-000007---
Tubing, Silicone,3/32"X7/32"2800392-100
68
3001-10-07069
Tubing,1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
69
0040-10-32301
Tubing,PTFE,.040"ID+/-.002"X.066"OD+/-.002
70
3101-20-68590
Fan of Power Supply Assembly
71
3101-20-68572
Fan of Main Unit
72
M07-00097S---
Switch
73
3001-10-07060
Aspirate key
A.2
No.
Spare pipes
Code/Model
Name
0040-10-32301
Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00
3001-10-07069
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon
A21-000002---
Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100
M6G-020006---
Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1
M6G-020007---
Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA
M6G-020009---
Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID
M90-000025---
Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603
A.3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Spare PCBA
Code/Model
051-000014-00
3101-30-68503
3101-30-68505
3101-30-68507
3101-30-68509
3101-30-68511
3101-30-68513
3101-30-68515
3101-30-68517
3101-30-68519
3102-30-69197
3102-30-69199
Name
Data board (including rootfs)
Drive board
Mother board
Liquid-level board
Power board
Volumetric board
Laser control board
FS pre-amplification board
SS pre-amplification board
Indicator board
Key board
Autoloading board
A-3
Appendixes
A.4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
A.5
No.
Spare cables
Code/Model
3100-20-49018
3100-20-49040
3101-20-68574
3101-20-68575
3101-20-68578
3101-20-68581
3101-20-68584
3101-20-68585
3101-20-68589
3101-20-68590
3101-20-68591
3101-20-68592
3101-21-68588
3101-21-68593
3102-20-69101
3102-20-69102
3102-20-69104
3102-20-69105
3102-20-69106
3102-20-69107
3102-20-69108
3102-20-69103
Name
Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the
computer)
Connecting cable of Micro-switch
Connecting cable of reagent sensor
Connecting cable of volumetric board
Connecting cable of power switch
Connecting cable of laser control
SS signal line
FS signal line
Connecting cable from switch to power board
Power box fan and connecting cable
Outlet earth wire
Connecting cable of pump
Connecting cable of AC input
Connecting cable of laser
Power cord of the autoloading unit
Connecting cable of autoloader control
Wiring harness of the mixing motors
Connecting cable of DIFF bath
Connecting cable of the indicator board
Connecting cable of the switch control
Connecting cable of the autoloading motors and sensors
of the autoloading motors and sensors
Spare connectors
Code/Model
Name
3001-10-07066
Tee connector T220/230-1
3102-20-69219
Waste tube connector
M90-100009---
Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID

Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange
M90-100010---
Nylon
M90-100012---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon
M90-100013---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon
M90-100015---
Lock Nut
M90-100016---
Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon

Connector.
Male
Luer
Lock
Ring,
For
MTLP
or
M90-100017---
LC23,Orange
10
M90-100019---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White
11
M90-100020---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black

A-4
Appendixes
12
M90-100021---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red
13
M90-100022---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green
14
M90-100023---
Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue
15
M90-100024---
Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1
16
M90-100025---
Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1
17
M90-100028---
Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
18
M90-100028-01
Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White
19
M90-100028-03
Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon
20
M90-100030---
Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon
21
M90-100046---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange
22
M90-100048---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White
23
M90-100049---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black
24
M90-100051---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green
25
M90-100052---
Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue
26
M90-100065---
Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White
27
M90-100069---
Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID
A.6
Consumables
No.
Name
Code/Model
Package
Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(Chinese/4L)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(English/4L)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(Chinese/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(English/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
M-53LH
A11-000105---
4LX1
A11-000113---
1LX4
A11-000128---
1LX4
A11-000129---
4LX1
A11-000114---
200mLX4
A11-000115---
400mLX4
A11-000130---
200mLX4
A11-000131---
400mLX4
A11-000116---
500mLX4
A-5
Appendixes
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
M-53LH
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LH
M-53LH
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53
Cleanser(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53
Cleanser(English/1LX4)
M-53D
Diluent(domestic/20L)
M-53D
Diluent(export/20L)
M-50P Probe Cleanser
domestic/50mL
18
M-50P Probe Cleanser

export/50mL
A11-000117---
1LX4
A11-000132---
500mLX4
A11-000133---
1LX4
A11-000118---
1LX4
A11-000134---
1LX4
A12-000140---
20LX1
A12-000167---
20LX1
A12-000151---
A12-000178---
A-6
50mLX1
50mLX1
B. List of Wearing Parts

No.
Code/Model
Name
3001-10-07054
Air Filter
3003-20-34941
Tee valve ASCO458284
3003-20-34942
Two-way valve ASCO458283
3006-20-74804
Probe Wipe
M07-00014S-00
VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC
M07-00076F---
FUSE Slow-Blow
M07-00077F---
FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A
M07-00079F---
FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A
M08-000789---
PHOTOELEC switch
10
M6G-020011---
Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/
B-1
C. Fluidic diagram
C-1
D. Pump and Valve Function Table

D1.
Valve Function Table
No.
V01
V02
V03
V04
Function
Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging
path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe.
Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging
path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe.
Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe
Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe
connects the sheath fluid syringe.
Two
way/Tee
3
3
3
2
V05
Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse
V06
Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse
V07
Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse
V08
V09
V10
V11
V12
V13
Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of
the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the
DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath
Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the
pressure chamber
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath
Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back
bath
3
2
2
2
2
2
V14
Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath
V15
Controls the aspiration of the cleanser
V21
V22
V23
V24
V25
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispensation
syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF
bath
Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses
sheath fluid
Empties the WBC volumetric tube
D-1
2
2
3
2
2
Appendixes
V26
Empties the RBC volumetric tube
V27
Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe
V28
Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell
V29
Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath
V30
Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath
V31
Empties the WBC volumetric tube
V32
Empties the RBC volumetric tube
V33
Controls the WBC counting
V34
Controls the RBC counting
V35
Controls the draining of the RBC bath
V36
Controls the draining of the WBC bath
V37
Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber
V38
Controls the draining of the DIFF bath
V39
Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample
D2.
Pump function table
Name
Function
Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash
P1
the aperture
Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the
P2
vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back
bath and drain the volumetric tube.
Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe
P3
D3.
Syringe function table

Name
Diluent syringe
Sheath syringe
Aspiration
Function
Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample
probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe
Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the
sample preparation tubing
Aspirates and dispenses samples
syringe
Sample syringe
Dispenses the sample into the flow cell
Lyse-Syringe
Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse
D-2
E. Tubing
E1.
Components
E-1
F. Method to identify cross network cable and

direct-connected network cable
F.1.
Identify cross network cable
1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
Connector of the network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B

End Awhite and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and
brown, and brown 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
F.2.
Identify direct-connected network cable
1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.
F-1
Appendixes
Connector of the direct-connected network cable

2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.
End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable

End Awhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
F-2
P/N: 046-000142-00(V1.0)

BC-5380 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-5380 Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment

any product of any other manufacturer.

Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

+86 755 26582479 26582888

+86 755 26582934 26582500

Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1

Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2

How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3

Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4

Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5

System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1

Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2

Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-3

Main Structure ....................................................................................................... 2-4

Software structure ............................................................................................... 2-11

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1

Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1

Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2

Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7

Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10

Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-27

Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-35

Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-41

Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-42

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-47

Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1

Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1

Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1

Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3

Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8

Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1

Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3

Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-32

Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-59

Autoloader board ................................................................................................. 5-99

Power board ...................................................................................................... 5-117

Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-129

Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140

Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-148

Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-154

5.10 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-160

Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings ....................................... 6-1

General .................................................................................................................. 6-3

Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-4

Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes........................................................ 6-11

Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-26

Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-29

Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-37

Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)................................................................... 6-39

Mix mechanism.................................................................................................... 6-58

6.10 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 6-66

Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1

Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1

Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-3

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-27

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1